# embedding_metadata

key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 130 - 
13 The new settings will take effect next time you perform measurement. Change the operation/graph 
settings and scale settings according to the new channel settings. 
Explanation 
 - Setting the data-in screen 
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the setting of the data-in screen. 
 - Setting the channel setting screen 
See the Explanation section for the Y-time describing the setting of the channel setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Setting the operation and graph setting screen 
The operation and graph setting screen lets you specify graph settings. 
• Operation 
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.9.1.3 (a), Circle graph operations. 
An operation cannot be specified if it does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table 
1.9.1.3 (b), Circle graph conditions. 
Table 1.9.1.3 (a) Circle graph operations 
Input value Operation name Description 
1 N/A Not displayed. 
21 Circle 
Circle error display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Circle error display 
Input 1 is the horizontal axis, and input 2 is the vertical axis. 
The reference circle used to calculate the error is set on the scale page. 
Table 1.9.1.3 (b) Circle graph conditions 
Operation Coordinate conversion Input 1 Input 2 Remarks 
21 : Circle 
1 : Normal Channel whose position has 
been measured 
Channel whose position has 
been measured 
2 : Polar 
Channel whose position has 
been measured 
(only when the data unit is 
mm, μm, or inch)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
mm, μm, or inch) 
Channel whose position has 
been measured 
(only when the data unit is 
deg) 
3 : Angular Channel whose position has 
been measured 
Channel whose position has 
been measured 
• Input 1 
Specifiable values are sequential, with channel 1 being 1. The maximum value is the largest channel 
number for which measurement is set during the channel setting process. A value that does not meet


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the graph display conditions defined in Table 1.9.1.3 (b), Circle graph conditions cannot be specified 
in input 1. 
• Input 2 
Specifiable values are sequential, with channel 1 being 1. The maximum value is the largest channel 
number for which measurement is set during the channel setting process. A value that does not meet 
the graph display conditions defined in Table 1.9.1.3 (b), Circle graph conditions cannot be specified 
in input 2. 
• Display unit 
The specifiable value is 4 (mm) only.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Coordinate conversion 
Specifiable values are 1 (Normal; no coordinate conversion), 2 (Polar; coordinate conversion for 
polar coordinate interpolation), and 3 (Angular; coordinate conversion for angular axis control). The 
conditions for the specifiable coordinate conversion types are as shown in Table 1.9.1.3 (c), 
Corresponding Circle graph coordinate conversion types.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 131 -
Table 1.9.1.3 (c) Corresponding Circle graph coordinate conversion types
Operation Input 1 Input 2 Specifiable coordinate 
conversion
21 : Circle
Channel whose position has been 
measured
Channel whose position 
has been measured 1 : Normal
Channel whose position has been 
measured
(only when the data unit is mm, µm, or 
inch)
Channel whose position 
has been measured
(only when the data unit is 
deg)
2 : Polar


key: chroma:document
string_value:
deg)
2 : Polar
Channel whose position has been 
measured
Channel whose position 
has been measured 3 : Angular
• Inclination
Specify the inclination in degrees. The specified value is effective only when Angular (coordinate 
conversion for angular axis control) is specified as the coordinate conversion type.
- Setting the scale screen
• Center
Set the center coordinates of the circle (respective coordinates of the horizontal and vertical axes).
• Radius
Set the radius of the circle.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Set the radius of the circle.
• Division
Set the scale of the circle display.
• Zoom
Set the zoom percentage when expanding the display in the direction of the center angle at the 
quadrant change point (direction change point for each axis). This is effective for getting a detailed 
view of quadrant protrusions. Under normal circumstances, set this value to 1.0.
- Performing measurement
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the performing measurement.
Limitation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 132 -
1.9.1.4 Fourier graph
This graph displays the frequency spectrum by performing digital Fourier conversion for the range of data 
displayed by the Y-time graph.
Up to four draws can be displayed at a time.
Displaying and setting the Fourier graph
Procedure
The procedure for displaying the measurement data is described below.
1 Display the Y-time graph according to the relevant procedure.
2 Click the soft key [FOURIER].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The wave display screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.4 (a).
Fig. 1.9.1.4 (a)
3 Click the soft key [OPERATION & GRAPH].
The operation and graph setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.4 (b).
Fig. 1.9.1.4 (b)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 133 -
4 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
5 Enter data and the press the key.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you set all the parameters.
7 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH].
8 Click the soft key [SCALE SET].
The scale setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.4 (c).
Fig. 1.9.1.4 (c)
9 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
10 Enter data and the press the key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 until you set all the parameters.
12 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH].
The wave display screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.4 (d).
Fig. 1.9.1.4 (d)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 134 -
- Changing the operation and graph setting screen
The procedure for changing the operation and graph setting screen as necessary is described below.
1 Click the soft key [OPERATION & GRAPH].
The operation and graph setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.4 (e).
Fig. 1.9.1.4 (e)
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
5 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH].
Based on the new operation and graph settings, the wave display screen is displayed as shown Fig. 
1.9.1.4 (f).
Fig. 1.9.1.4 (f)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 135 -
- Changing the scale screen
The procedure for changing the scale settings as necessary is described below.
1 Click the soft key [SCALE SET].
The scale setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.4 (g).
Fig. 1.9.1.4 (g)
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
5 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Based on the new scale settings, the wave display screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.4 (h).
Fig. 1.9.1.4 (h)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 136 -
- Manipulating the Fourier graph
By clicking the following soft keys, you can perform the operations corresponding to them.
[MEASUREMENT] : Performs a measurement-related operation.
[GAIN ↑] : Shifts the gain graph downward.
[GAIN ↓] : Shifts the gain graph upward.
[GAIN V-EXP] : Expands the gain graph.
[GAIN V-RED] : Reduces the gain graph.
[AUTO SCALE] : Enables auto scaling.
[PHASE ↑] : Shifts the phase graph downward.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[PHASE ↓] : Shifts the phase graph upward.
[PHASE V-EXP] : Expands the phase graph.
[PHASE V-RED] : Reduces the phase graph.
[DRAW 1UNDSP] : Sets whether or not to display Draw 1.
[DRAW 2UNDSP] : Sets whether or not to display Draw 2.
[DRAW 3UNDSP] : Sets whether or not to display Draw 3.
[DRAW 4UNDSP] : Sets whether or not to display Draw 4.
[OPE/G SET] : Sets operations and graphs.
[SCALE SET] : Sets scales.
[COM1 INPUT] : Inputs comment 1.
[COM2 INPUT] : Inputs comment 2.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Y-TIME] : Switches to the Y-Time.
[XY] : Switches to the XY graph.
[CIRCLE] : Switches to the Circle graph.
[BODE] : Switches to the Bode graph.
Explanation
- Setting the operation and graph setting screen
The operation and graph setting screen lets you specify up to four graph settings per draw.
• Operation
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.9.1.4 (a), Fourier graph operations.
An operation cannot be specified if it does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1.9.1.4 (b), Fourier graph conditions.
Table 1.9.1.4 (a) Fourier graph operations
Input value Operation name Description
1 N/A Not displayed.
31 Fourier Displays the frequency spectrum by performing digital Fourier conversion.
Table 1.9.1.4 (b) Fourier graph conditions
Operation Condition Remarks
31 : Fourier
Draws of the Y-time graph correspond to those of the Fourier graph 
on a one-to-one basis. The Fourier operation can be set only when 
the corresponding Y-time graph draw is effective.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Setting the scale screen
• Start point
Set gain and phase data values for the center of the graph.
• Division
Set the value of one grid.
• Frequency
Set the minimum and maximum values of the horizontal axis. Since the unit is dependent on the time 
range selected for the Y-time graph, 1 is not necessarily equal to 1 Hz.
(Example) When a 0.1-second time range is selected, 1 is equal to 1 Hz.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 137 -
Limitation
See the Limitation section for the Y-time graph.
1.9.1.5 Bode graph
This graph displays a Bode diagram for the measurement data in the form of a horizontal axis logarithm 
graph.
Only one draw can be displayed at a time.
Displaying and setting the Bode graph
Procedure
To display the Bode graph, set the parameters for automatic vibration (disturbance input function) using 
servo software.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
servo software. 
The procedure for displaying the measurement data is described below.
1 Press the function key.
2 Press and hold this key until [PARAMETER] appears. 
3 Set the following parameters. 
No.2326 (Disturbance input gain) Recommended value: 500
No.2327 (Start frequency of disturbance input) Recommended value: 20
No.2328 (End frequency of disturbance input) Recommended value: 1000
No.2329 (Number of disturbance input measurement points） Recommended value：3


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 When bit 7 (DSTIN) of parameter No. 2270 changes from 0 to 1, disturbance input starts. This 
operation needs to be performed to start measurement, so a program that changes bit 7 (DSTIN) of 
parameter No. 2270 from 0 to 1 with program data input (G10) must have been created in advance.
Programming example: When the Z-axis (third axis) is vibrated (when bit 4 (G1B) of parameter 3454 is 
1) 
O1234
N1G10L52 ; Parameter input mode (this N number is used for a trigger.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
N2270 P3 Q7 R1; Set DSTIN (bit 7 of parameter No. 2270).
G11 ; Cancel the parameter input mode. 
N2G04X10.; Wait for completion of vibration.
N99G10L52 ; Parameter input mode
N2270 P3 Q7 R0; Clear DSTIN (bit 7 of parameter No. 2270).
G11 ; Cancel the parameter input mode. 
M30
5 Press the continuous menu key several times until [SERVO GUIDE MATE] is displayed.
6 Click the soft key [SERVO GUIDE MATE].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 138 -
7 Click the soft key [BODE].
The wave display screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (a).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (a)
8 Click the soft key [MEASUREMENT].
9 Click the soft key [DATA IN].
10 Click the soft key [SAMPLING].
The data-in screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (b).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (b)
11 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
12 Enter data and the press the key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 139 -
14 Click the soft key [SET CHANNEL].
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (c).
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed, display the setting screen for the desired 
channel by pressing the or key.
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (c)
15 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
16 Enter data and the press the key.
17 Repeat steps 15 and 16 until you set all the parameters.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To display the Bode graph, make the channel settings of the Bode graph in Table 1.9.1.5 (a). At this 
time, be sure to disable channel 4 (axis for channel 4 is 0). 
Table 1.9.1.5 (a) Bode graph channel settings
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
AXIS Specify the same servo motor axis.
TYPE 2 : TCMD 16 : FRTCM 15 : FREQ
UNIT 33 : % 33 : A(p) 32 : Hz
CONV.COEF 100 100 1
CONV.BASE 7282 -7282 1
ORIGIN VALUE 0 0 0
Set a trigger that corresponds to the program prepared in step 4.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(In the programming example, set N number for a trigger to 1.)
18 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 140 -
19 Click the soft key [OPERATION & GRAPH].
The operation and graph setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (d).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (d)
20 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
21 Enter data and the press the key.
22 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH].
23 Click the soft key [SCALE SET].
The scale setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (e).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (e)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (e)
24 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
25 Enter data and the press the key.
26 Repeat steps 21 and 22 until you set all the parameters.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 141 -
27 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH].
28 Click the soft key [MEASUREMENT].
29 Click the soft key [START].
30 Perform automatic operation of the program prepared in step 4.
31 When the measurement is completed, the wave display screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (f).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (f)
- Changing the operation and graph setting screen
The procedure for changing the operation and graph setting screen as necessary is described below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Click the soft key [OPERATION & GRAPH].
The operation and graph setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (g).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (g)
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 142 -
4 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH].
Based on the new operation and graph settings, the wave display screen is displayed as shown Fig. 
1.9.1.5 (h).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (h)
- Changing the scale screen
The procedure for changing the scale settings as necessary is described below.
1 Click the soft key [SCALE SET].
The scale setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (i).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (i)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (i)
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 143 -
5 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH].
Based on the new scale settings, the wave display screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (j).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (j)
- Manipulating the Bode graph
By clicking the following soft keys, you can perform the operations corresponding to them.
[MEASUREMENT] : Performs a measurement-related operation.
[GAIN ↑] : Shifts the gain graph downward.
[GAIN ↓] : Shifts the gain graph upward.
[GAIN V-EXP] : Expands the gain graph.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[GAIN V-RED] : Reduces the gain graph.
[AUTO SCALE] : Enables auto scaling.
[PHASE ↑] : Shifts the phase graph downward.
[PHASE ↓] : Shifts the phase graph upward.
[PHASE V-EXP] : Expands the phase graph.
[PHASE V-RED] : Reduces the phase graph.
[DRAW 1UNDSP] : Sets whether or not to display Draw 1.
[OPE/G SET] : Sets operations and graphs.
[SCALE SET] : Sets scales.
[COM1 INPUT] : Inputs comment 1.
[COM2 INPUT] : Inputs comment 2.
[Y-TIME] : Switches to the Y-Time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[XY] : Switches to the XY graph.
[CIRCLE] : Switches to the Circle graph.
[FOURIER] : Switches to the Fourier graph.
- Performing measurement
When you click the soft key [MEASUREMENT], you can perform the operations corresponding to the 
menu items that follow.
[START] : Starts measurement.
[ORIGIN] : Sets the origin value.
[STOP] : Stops measurement.
[DATA IN] : Specifies measurement-related settings.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 144 -
- Changing measurement settings
1 When you click the soft key [MEASUREMENT] and then the soft key [DATA IN], you can perform 
the operations corresponding to the menu items that follow.
2 Click the soft key [LIST].
The list screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (k).
To display any channel other than the one currently displayed, display the list screen for the desired 
channel by pressing the or key.
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (k)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (k)
3 Check the current settings on the list screen.
4 Click the soft key [SAMPLING].
The data-in screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (l).
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (l)
5 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 145 - 
6 Enter data and the press the key. 
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you set all the parameters. 
8 Click the soft key [SET CHANNEL]. 
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (m). 
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed, display the setting screen for the desired 
channel by pressing the or key. 
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (m) 
9 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the cursor key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10 Enter data and the press the key. 
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 until you set all the parameters. 
12 Click the soft key [RE-DSPGRAPH]. 
The wave display screen is displayed as shown Fig. 1.9.1.5 (n). 
Fig. 1.9.1.5 (n)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 146 - 
13 The new settings will take effect next time you perform measurement. Change the operation/graph 
settings and scale settings according to the new channel settings. 
Explanation 
 - Setting the data-in screen 
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the setting the data-in screen. 
 - Setting the channel setting screen 
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the setting the channel setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Setting the operation and graph setting screen 
The operation and graph setting screen lets you specify graph settings. 
• Operation 
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.9.1.5 (b), Bode graph operations. 
An operation cannot be specified if it does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table 
1.9.1.5 (c), Bode graph conditions. 
Table 1.9.1.5 (b) Bode graph operations 
Input value Operation name Description 
1 N/A Not displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 N/A Not displayed. 
41 Bode Displays a Bode diagram in the form of a horizontal axis logarithm graph. 
Table 1.9.1.5 (c) Bode graph conditions 
Operation Condition 
41 : Bode 
The measurement and channel settings must meet the following conditions. 
CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3 
AXIS Specify the same servo motor axis. 
TYPE 2 : TCMD 16 : FRTCM 15 : FREQ 
UNIT 33 : % 33 : % 32 : Hz 
CONV.COEF 100 100 1 
CONV.BASE 7282 -7282 1 
ORIGIN VALUE 0 0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ORIGIN VALUE 0 0 0 
Channel 4 must be disabled (channel 4 axis must be set to0). 
 - Setting the scale screen 
• Start point 
Set gain and phase data values for the center of the graph. 
• Division 
Set the value of one grid. 
• Frequency 
Set the minimum and maximum values of the horizontal axis. The unit is Hz. 
 - Performing measurement 
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the performing measurement. 
Limitation 
See the Limitation section for the Y-time graph.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 147 -
1.9.1.6 Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2270 DSTIN DSTTAN DSTWAV DSTMV ACREF
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#3 ACREF Adaptive resonance elimination filter
0: Disabled
1: Enabled 
When this function is enabled, disable it temporarily and then use the disturbance input 
function. 
(This is because the resonance elimination filter changes in response to the vibration of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the axis even if the vibration is caused by the disturbance input function.)
#4 DSTMV Usually, set 0.
#5 DSTWAV The input waveform of disturbance input is:
0: Sine wave.
1: Square wave.
Usually, set 0.
#6 DSTTN Disturbance is:
0: Input for one axis only.
1: Input for both the L and M axes.
Usually, set 0. To be set only for the L axis side of synchronous axes or tandem axes.
#7 DSTIN Disturbance input
0: Stop
1: Start
Disturbance input starts on the rising edge from 0 to 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2326 Disturbance input gain
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] TCMD unit (maximum amplifier current: 7282)
[Valid data range] 0 to 7282
First, set about 500 to apply vibration to the machine so that light sound is generated.
2327 Start frequency of disturbance input
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Hz
[Valid data range] 1 to 2000
[Guide setting] 10
Set the frequency at which vibration starts.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 148 -
2328 End frequency of disturbance input
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Hz
[Valid data range] 1 to 2000
[Guide setting] 1000
Set the frequency at which vibration terminates.
2329 Number of disturbance input measurement points
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Guide setting] 3
Set the number of measurement points by the disturbance input function (number of 
vibrations).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
vibrations).
For details on the disturbance input function, refer to the PARAMETER MANUAL 
(B-65270EN) for the servo motor. 
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3454 G1B
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#4 G1B In programmable parameter input, the change command for a particular bit parameter is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The bit number is specified by Q_.)
1.10 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN
The maintenance information screen is provided to record the history of maintenance performed by a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
service person of FANUC or machine tool builder.
The screen has the following features:
• MDI alphabetical input is allowed.
(Half-size kana input is for Japanese display only.)
• The recording screen can be scrolled in units of lines.
• Edited maintenance information can be input and output.
• Records are stored in Flash ROM.
• Double-byte (shift JIS) codes can be displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 149 -
1.10.1 Displaying the Maintenance Information Screen
1. Press function key .
2. Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [M-INFO] is displayed.
3. Press the soft key [M-INFO]. The maintenance information screen appears.
When selected, the maintenance screen shows the latest information.
The status (mode, number of empty character spaces, cursor line, column number) is displayed at the 
bottom of the screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
bottom of the screen.
Fig. 1.10.1 (a) MAINTENANCE INFORMATION screen
Status display
<1> OVER / INSERT
OVER: Overwrite mode
INSERT: Insert input mode.
<2> EDIT / READ
EDIT: Editing allowed
READ: Editing inhibited
<3> Number of empty character spaces
Number of empty character spaces as half-size characters
<4> Current cursor line
Position of the line on which the cursor is currently located.
<5> Current cursor column
Position of the column at which the cursor is currently located.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
The numbers of lines and columns that can be displayed by each LCD are:
• 10.4” display unit: 37 characters x 12 lines
• 15” display unit: 38 characters x 19 lines


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 150 -
1.10.2 Operating the Maintenance Information Screen
The maintenance information screen has view mode and edit mode, which are selected by pressing the 
soft key [END] or [EDIT].
Initially, view mode is selected. To start editing, select edit mode by pressing the soft keys [(OPRT)] and 
[EDIT]. When the editing is completed, press the soft key [END] key. Then, select soft key [SAVE] or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[QUIT]. Unless soft key [SAVE] is selected, the edited data will be lost at next power-up.
To scroll the screen showing the recorded information, press a cursor keys or page keys on the MDI 
panel.
The following keys are used for editing (character input) and viewing:
Table 1.10.2 (a) Table of (edit) operations on the maintenance information screen
Mode Key Description
View Soft key
[EDIT] Allows editing.
[JUMP] Displays the beginning or the end.
Cursor keys Scrolls the screen up or down.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Page keys Scrolls the screen up or down in units of whole screens.
Edit Soft key
[END] Ends editing. Select whether to save the edited data.
[KN/ABC] Switches between half-size kana input and alphabetic input modes. 
(Supports Japanese display only.)
[CLEAR ALL] Clears all maintenance information. (This key is enabled when the bit 7 
(MDC) of parameter No. 3116 is set to 1.)
[I/O] Inputs or outputs the maintenance information.
[JUMP] Moves the cursor to the beginning or end.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Cursor keys Moves the cursor position up or down.
Page keys Scrolls the screen up or down in units of whole screens.
Alphanumeric/ special 
character keys
Allows alphabetical, numeric, or special character input. (For details of 
half-size kana input, see Item, " Half-size kana input".)
key Switches between insert and overwrite modes.
key
• If the key input buffer does not contain any character, deletes the one 
character at the cursor position.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• If the key input buffer contains characters, deletes the characters from 
the buffer.
key
• If the key input buffer does not contain any character, deletes the one 
character before the cursor.
• If the key input buffer contains characters, deletes the one character 
from the buffer.
key
• If the key input buffer does not contain any character, starts a new line.
• If the key input buffer contains characters, outputs the characters from 
the buffer to the information screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 151 -
1.10.3 Half-Size Kana Input on the Maintenance Information Screen
By pressing soft key [KN/ABC], you can switch between half-size kana input and alphabetic input 
modes.
In half-size kana input mode, alphabetic characters are converted in accordance with the "half-size 
kana/Roman character conversion table" and resultant half-size kana characters are displayed in the key 
input buffer.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
input buffer.
Pressing the key causes the characters in the key input buffer to be output to maintenance 
information.
Pressing the key causes the characters to be deleted from the key input buffer and the one 
character of the maintenance information on which the cursor is positioned to be deleted.
Pressing the key causes cancels conversion, and deletes one character from the key input buffer. If


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the key input buffer does not contain any character, the one character of the maintenance information that 
immediately precedes the cursor is deleted.
1.10.4 Warnings That Occurs on the Maintenance Information 
Screen
The following warnings occur on the maintenance information screen.
Table 1.10.4 (a)
Warning message Meaning
NO MORE SPACE An overflow occurred in CNC memory.
ALARM The operation could not be performed because an alarm was generated in the 
CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC.
BUSY Wait for CNC processing to end or make a retry.
ILLEGAL DATA Investigate data and correct it as required.
WRONG MODE The CNC is in wrong mode.
COMMAND ILLEGAL USE A corresponding CNC option cannot be found.
PARAMETER ERROR CNC parameter settings contain an error.
EDIT REJECTED An attempt was made to perform an edit operation on data that could not be 
edited.
WRITE PROTECT Writing is prohibited.
COMMAND REJECT The CNC rejected the execution of the processing. Check the execution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 152 -
1.10.5 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3116 MDC
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#7 MDC Maintenance information data:
0: Cannot be erased entirely.
1: Can be erased entirely.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3206 MIF
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 MIF Editing of the maintenance information screen is:
0: Not prohibited.
1: Prohibited.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8901 MEN
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Data type] Bit path
#7 MEN The periodic maintenance screen is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
1.10.6 Overview of the History Function
It is possible to record history of operations performed by the operator, alarms that occurred, external 
operator messages, etc. in order to check the history or output history data. 
1 Conditions under which history is recorded
a Display screen
History is recorded when a screen other than the operation history screen is displayed.
b Signal selection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
b Signal selection 
Up to 60 input/output signals for which history is recorded can be selected.
c Parameter setting
It is possible to set parameters in order to specify individually whether to record data change 
history such as operation history of the MDI key, history of external operator messages, 
addition of external alarms/messages, parameters/tool offset, workpiece offset (workpiece shift 
amount)/custom macro common variable, operation history of input/output signals. 
d Storage capacity


key: chroma:document
string_value:
d Storage capacity
When the storage capacity is exhausted, data is deleted in the chronological order, oldest first. 
A maximum of approximately 8000 history items can be recorded when, for example, only the 
operation history of the MDI key is stored.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 153 -
2 Data output
All the history data items stored can be output to an external input/output unit (see the section about 
outputting of all history data).
3 Deletion of history
When bit 7 (EKE) of parameter No. 3195 is 1, soft key [ALL CLEAR] appears, which can be used 
to delete history data. 
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3195 EKE
[Data type] Bit
#7 EKE The [ALL CLEAR] soft key for clearing all history data is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1: Displayed.
NOTE
1 History data is not cleared even after power-off.
If memory clear operation is performed, however, history data is also deleted. 
2 The correct date and time need to be set on the setting screen.
3 All history data items including alarms, external operator messages, operations, 
and input/output signals are integrated into one and stored in a single storage 
area. Therefore, when the storage capacity is exhausted, data is deleted in the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
chronological order, oldest first, regardless of the type of history.
The deletion of history data deletes all history data, so care should be executed 
before performing deletion.
Delete operation cannot be performed on a per-history-type basis. 
1.10.6.1 Alarm history
Only alarm history is extracted from all history data recorded and displayed on the screen. When the 
amount of history data exceeds the storage capacity, data is automatically deleted in the chronological 
order, oldest first.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 154 -
Screen display
The alarms that occurred are displayed in the chronological order, most recent first. 
The following items are indicated for each alarm. 
Path name (only for multi-path operation)
Date and time of alarm issuance
Alarm type and number
Alarm message
NOTE
To record external alarm and macro alarm messages as history data, set bit 3 
(EAH) of parameter No. 3112 to 1 and bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the path name, axis name, or spindle name is changed after occurrence of an alarm, the new name is 
displayed on the alarm history screen. 
For modal 'O' data, only the first five characters are output in the case of the program name. 
- Procedure
1 Press function key to display the screen for parameters etc.
2 Press return menu key .
3 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [HISTORY] is displayed.
4 Press soft key [HISTORY] to display the alarm history screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press page switching keys to move between the previous page and the next page.
Displaying alarm history for peripheral axis control
If an alarm occurs on peripheral axis control 1, the alarm is displayed under "PERIPHERAL 01" on alarm 
history screen as follows. In case of peripheral axis 2 or 3, the alarm is displayed under "PERIPHERAL 
02" or "PERIPHERAL 03".
Fig.1.10.6.1 (b) Displaying alarm history peripheral axis control (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 155 -
Deleting history data on the alarm history screen
- Procedure
1 Display the alarm history screen.
2 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
3 If soft key [(CLEAR)] is pressed, all history data is deleted.
NOTE
The delete operation deletes not only alarm history, but also external operator 
message history, operation history, and other history data. Delete operation 
cannot be performed on a per-history-type basis. 
Holding alarm history


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Holding alarm history
Alarm history is held in the same storage area as in other history data such as key operation history and 
signal change history. Therefore, alarm history is deleted when the storage capacity is fully exhausted by 
other history data.
When bit 2 (SAH) of parameter No. 11354 is set to 1, alarm history data is stored in the area specific to 
alarm history and recorded in the storage area for operation history. Accordingly, up to 50 alarm history


key: chroma:document
string_value:
items can be held even if the storage capacity is fully exhausted by other history data. 
However, additional information (modal data, absolute coordinates, and machine coordinates during 
occurrence of an alarm) is not recorded in the area specific to alarm history. (The additional information 
is recorded in the storage area of operation history.) 
Deleting alarm history
If history is deleted on the alarm history screen when bit 2 (SAH) of parameter No. 11354 is set to 1, only


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the alarm history is deleted. Even if history is deleted on the operation history screen or external operator 
message screen, alarm history is not deleted. 
Parameter setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11354 SAH
[Data type] Bit
#2 SAH When the storage capacity for history data is exceeded due to non-alarm history, alarm 
history will be:
0: Erased.
1: Erased, except the most recent 50 items of history data.
Displaying an external alarm or macro alarm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When an external alarm or macro alarm is caused by setting the following parameters, the message in 
addition to the alarm number can be recorded in alarm history.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 EAH
[Data type] Bit
#3 EAH Messages of the external alarm/macro alarm in alarm or operation history:
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 156 -
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is 
set to 0.
2 In case of using Multi-language PMC message function, when you 
change displaying language setting for CNC screen, external alarm 
messages that are currently displayed are registered again in alarm 
history.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3196 HAL
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Data type] Bit
#7 HAL When an alarm is issued, additional information (modal data, absolute coordinates, and 
machine coordinates present at the issuance of the alarm) is:
0: Recorded in the operation history and alarm history.
1: Not recorded in the operation history and alarm history.
NOTE
1 Since alarms, operations, external operator messages, and data 
change history are held in the same storage area, alarm history 
may be deleted if the storage capacity is fully exhausted by other


key: chroma:document
string_value:
history data. 
2 The maximum number of history items that can be recorded is 
shown below (when the history items are alarms).
When bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is 1, the maximum 
number is approximately 4000.
When bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is 0, the maximum 
number depends on the system because the modal information 
and coordinates during occurrence of an alarm are also recorded. 
(Example: 280 for 5-axis systems and 200 for 10-axis systems)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When bit 3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112 is 1, however, messages 
for macro alarms and external alarms are also recorded, the 
maximum number is further reduced.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 157 -
1.10.6.2 External operator message history
Only external operator message history and macro message history are extracted from all history data 
recorded and displayed on the screen. When the amount of history data exceeds the storage capacity, data 
is automatically deleted in the chronological order, oldest first. 
Fig. 1.10.6.2 (a) External operator message history screen
Screen display
- Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [MESSAGE HISTRY]] is 
displayed.
3 Press soft key [MESSAGE HISTRY]] to display the external operator message history screen.
4 Press page switching keys to move between the previous page and the next page.
NOTE
1 Since external operator messages, operations, alarms, and data change history 
are held in the same storage area, external operator message history may be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
deleted if the storage capacity is fully exhausted by other history data. 
2 The maximum number of history items that can be recorded is approximately 
150 (when the history items are external operator messages).
Deleting history data from the external operator message history screen
- Procedure
1 Display the external operator message history screen.
2 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
3 If soft key [CLEAR] is pressed, all history data is deleted.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
The delete operation deletes not only external operator message history, but 
also operation history, alarm history, and other history data. Delete operation 
cannot be performed on a per-history-type basis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 158 -
Holding external operator message history
External operator message history is held in the same storage area as in other history data such as key 
operation history and signal change history. Therefore, external operator message history is deleted when 
the storage capacity is fully exhausted by other history data.
When bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354 is set to 1, external operator message history data is stored in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the area specific to external operator message history and recorded in the storage area for operation 
history. Accordingly, external operator message history items can be held even if the storage capacity is 
fully exhausted by other history data. 
Deleting external operator message history
If history is deleted on the external operator message history screen when bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11354 is set to 1, only the external operator message history is deleted. Even if history is deleted on the 
operation history screen or alarm history screen, external operator message history is not deleted. 
Number of characters in external operator message history and number of 
external operator messages
When bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354 is set to 1, the number of characters in external operator


key: chroma:document
string_value:
message history and the number of external operator messages are set by bit 6 (MS0) and bit 7 (MS1) of 
parameter No. 3113. The correspondence between the settings, the number of characters, and the number 
of messages is shown in Table 1.10.6.2 (a).
Table 1.10.6.2 (a)
Parameter Maximum number of characters Number of messages
MS0=0 MS1=0 255 8
MS0=1 MS1=0 200 10
MS0=0 MS1=1 100 18
MS0=1 MS1=1 50 32
Parameter setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OMH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Data type] Bit
#2 OMH The external operator message history screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 HMC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 HMC The contents of the external operator message history:
0: Cannot be erased.
1: Can be erased.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354 is 
set to 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 159 -
#6 MS0
#7 MS1 Set the combination of the number of characters and the number of messages to be 
preserved in the external operator message history.
Table 1.10.6.2 (b) 
Parameter Maximum number of characters Number of messages
MS0=0 MS1=0 255 8
MS0=1 MS1=0 200 10
MS0=0 MS1=1 100 18
MS0=1 MS1=1 50 32
NOTE
1 Although up to 255 characters can be specified for each external 
operator message, you can use the combination of bits 6 (MS0)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113 to limit the number of 
characters and select the number of messages to be preserved in 
the external operator message history.
2 The settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113 
take effect the next time the power is turned on. The external 
operator message history is erased at that time.
3 Even though you change the settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) 
of parameter No. 3113, the alarm PW0000, "POWER MUST BE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OFF" is not issued. You must however turn on the power again 
before the new settings can take effect.
4 If text (such as single-byte katakana or kanji characters) is entered 
in character code, the number of characters recorded in the 
external operator message history may be smaller than the 
maximum number of characters set by bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of 
parameter No. 3113.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3196 HOM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Data type] Bit
#6 HOM A history of external operator messages and macro messages ((#3006) is:
0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.
NOTE
In case of using Multi-language PMC message function, when you 
change displaying language setting for CNC screen, external 
operator message that are currently displayed are registered again 
in external operator message history.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11354 SOH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 160 -
#3 SOH When the storage capacity for history data is exceeded due to data other than external 
operator message history, external operator message history will be:
0: Erased.
1: Retained.
NOTE
1 The setting of bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354 will be effective 
the next time the power is turned on. At this time, all history data 
(operation history, alarm history, and external operator message 
history) will be erased.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
history) will be erased.
2 When bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354 is set to 1, the number 
of history data items that can be retained varies. The number of 
history data items that can be recorded as follows:
Bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354=0 . . . Approx. 8000 items
Bit 3 (SOH) of parameter No. 11354=1 . . . Approx. 7500 items
(*) The numbers of items above are those if only key operation 
history is recorded.
1.10.6.3 Operation history


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1.10.6.3 Operation history
This function displays the history of key-in and signal operation performed by the operator when a failure 
or alarm occurs and the history of an alarm that occurred. 
What is recorded is shown below.
a Operation history
i MDI key operation by the operator
ii Turning on or off of output signals (X, Y, G, F)
b Alarm history
i Alarm that occurred 
ii Modal information and coordinates of the block executed during occurrence of an alarm
(Not displayed on the screen.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Not displayed on the screen.)
c Data change history
i Change of tool offset data
(When the bit 0 (HTO) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1)
ii Change of workpiece offset data/extended workpiece offset data/workpiece shift amount (T 
series)
(When the bit 1 (HWO) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1)
iii Change of a parameter
(When the bit 2 (HPM) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1)
iv Change of custom macro common variable data
(When the bit 3 (HMV) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
d External operator message history and macro message history
(When the bit 6 (HOM) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 0)
e Time stamp (date/time)
History data of operation history and alarm history except certain parts can be referenced on the operation 
history screen. (Data change history, external operator message history, and alarm messages are not 
displayed.)
All of recorded history data can be output to external input/output units.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
The maximum number of items that can be recorded is approximately 8000 
when the items are assumed to be MDI key operation history. Since each history 
data size is not constant, however, the maximum number varies.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 161 -
Parameter setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 OPH
#4 OPH The operation history screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 1440
Time data is recorded in operation history at specified time intervals.
When 0 is set, the specification of a time period of 10 minutes is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If data to be recorded is not present within the time period, no time data is recorded. 
NOTE
This parameter must be set to the same value for all paths.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3195 EKE HDE HKE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 HKE A key operation history is:
0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.
#6 HDE A DI/DO history is:
0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.
#7 EKE The [ALL CLEAR] soft key for clearing all history data is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3196 HAL HOM HMV HPM HWO HTO
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 HTO A modification history of tool offset data is:
0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.
#1 HWO A modification history of workpiece offset data/extended workpiece offset 
data/workpiece shift (T series) is:
0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 162 -
#2 HPM A modification history of parameters is:
0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.
#3 HMV A modification history of custom macro common variables is:
0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.
#6 HOM A history of external operator messages and macro messages ((#3006) is:
0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.
#7 HAL When an alarm is issued, additional information (modal data, absolute coordinates, and 
machine coordinates present at the issuance of the alarm) is:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0: Recorded in the operation history and alarm history.
1: Not recorded in the operation history and alarm history.
To record as many alarm history items as possible, rather than detailed alarm information, 
set 1. In addition, 10 G code modal group numbers that need to be recorded are set in 
parameters Nos. 12990 to 12999.
12990 G code modal group (first one) to be recorded as history data when an alarm is issued
to to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to to
12999 G code modal group (tenth one) to be recorded as history data when an alarm is issued
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum G code group number
Set a G code modal group number to be recorded as alarm history and operation history 
data when an alarm is issued.
* If a specified value falls outside the data range, the states of groups 01 to 10 are 
recorded. 
Screen display
- Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] and then press soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] that newly appears 
to display the operation history screen. 
4 To display subsequent operation history, press page switching keys to move between the 
previous page and the next page.
To display the portion between pages, press one of cursor keys to shift the display by 
half page.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
half page.
When soft key [(OPRT)] is pressed on the operation history screen, the following soft key operations 
can be performed.
a Pressing [TOP] displays the first page, which contains the oldest data.
b Pressing [BOTTOM] displays the last page, which contains the latest data.
c Pressing [NO.SRH] displays specified operation history data.
(Example) Entering 50 and pressing [NO.SRH] display 50th data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 163 -
Fig. 1.10.6.3 (a) Operation history screen 
Displayed information
1 Serial number and display start history number/total number of history items
A serial number is indicated to the left of each of recorded history data items. The smaller the serial 
number, the older the data item.
The display start history number/total number of history items is displayed at the upper right of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen. The number of history data items that is not displayed on the screen is not included in the 
total number of history items. 
2 Data
• MDI key
When bit 5 (HKE) of parameter No. 3195 is 0, key operations are recorded.
A key operation is preceded by a path number as follows: 1_[LEFT F] or 2_[LEFT F]. (When 
the number of paths is 1, no path number is displayed.) 
P_ of P_[LEFT F] indicates an external key operation.
i Address keys, numerical keys


key: chroma:document
string_value:
i Address keys, numerical keys
Characters such as A to Z, 0 to 9, ";", "+", and "-" are directly displayed with black text.
ii Function menu keys, operation menu keys, soft keys 
A key name is enclosed by square brackets as follows and displayed with green text: 
[LEFT F], [SOFT 1] to [SOFT 10], [RIGHT F].
iii Function keys, page keys, cursor keys, etc. 
A key name is enclosed by angle brackets as follows and displayed with green text: 
<POS>, <SYSTEM>, <PAGE ↑>, <CUR →>, <RESET>, <INPUT>, etc.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 164 -
• Input/output signals
When bit 6 (HDE) of parameter No. 3195 is 0, the input/output signal specified on the 
operation history signal selection screen is recorded. The address of the signal and a change in 
each bit are displayed. This display is performed with purple text.
G000.2 ↓ 
An up arrow indicates a change from 0 to 1.
 A down arrow indicates a change from 1 to 0.
Indicates a bit.
Indicates the address of a signal.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 When multiple bits at the same address change at the same timing, the change 
is handled as one history data item.
2 A change in a signal less than 4 msec is not recorded as history data. 
• Alarm
The number of an alarm and the time when the alarm occurred are displayed on the operation 
history screen.
The display is performed with white text against a red background.
Indicates a path number.
Indicates an alarm number.
Indicates a servo axis name for a servo axis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Indicates a spindle name or number for a spindle.
1_OT0506 ( XA1) 
2004/01/11 Indicates the year/month/date and time on two lines. 
 11:22:33 
If a path name, axis name, or spindle name is changed after occurrence of an alarm, the new 
name is displayed.
• Date/time
The data and time of the following items are displayed on two lines.
i The date and time of power-on are displayed with white text against a green background.
ii The date and time of power-off are displayed with green text.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
iii The date when the date changes is displayed with black text.
iv The dates and times at certain time intervals set in parameter No. 3122 are displayed with 
black text.
v The date and time when history data was deleted is displayed with black text. 
NOTE
1 In storing time data at certain time intervals, if data to be stored is not present 
within a certain time period, the time data is not stored. (If time data is stored 
because the date changes, data to be stored is assumed to be present.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 If the date and time of a CNC system is changed, the new date and time may be 
recorded as the date and time in iii or iv.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 165 -
History data not displayed on the screen
In addition to history data such as the MDI key, input/output signal state, alarm that occurred, external 
operator message (not displayed on the operation history screen), and time stamp, the following data can 
be displayed together with time data. These history data items cannot be displayed on the screen, but can 
be output to external input/output units (see the section about outputting of all history data).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Detailed data during occurrence of an alarm
When bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is 0, 10 G code modals of the block that was being 
executed during occurrence of an alarm, the second auxiliary function codes D, E, F, H, M, N, O, S, 
and T, absolute values, and machine coordinates are recorded together with the alarm number and 
the time of occurrence.
The group numbers of 10 G code modals to be recorded are set in parameters Nos. 12990 to 12999.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If they are not set, the G code modals of groups 01 to 10 are recorded.
NOTE
For modal 'O' data, only the first five characters are recorded in the case of the 
program name. 
To increase the number as compared with detailed data on occurrence of an 
alarm, set bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 to 1. 
2 External alarm message and macro alarm message
When bit 3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112 is 1, external alarm messages and macro alarm messages


key: chroma:document
string_value:
can be recorded as history data. However, only the first 64 characters are recorded.
NOTE
To record external alarm messages and macro alarm messages as history data, 
set bit 3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112 to 1 and bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 
3196 to 0.
3 Changing the tool offset data
When bit 0 (HTO) of parameter No. 3196 is 1, changing the tool offset data records the changed 
offset number and type, the changed tool offset data, the new tool offset data, and the change time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Changing the workpiece offset, extended workpiece offset, or workpiece shift (T series) data
When bit 1 (HWO) of parameter No. 3196 is 1, changing the workpiece offset data records the 
changed offset number, the changed workpiece offset data, the new workpiece offset data, and the 
change time. These items are also recorded when the extended workpiece offset or workpiece shift 
amount (for the T series) is changed.
5 Changing a parameter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Changing a parameter
When bit 2 (HPM) of parameter No. 3196 is 1, changing a parameter records the changed parameter 
number, type (axis type, spindle type, path type, and machine group type), the changed parameter 
data, the new parameter data, and the change time.
NOTE
History concerning changes during power-on and changes of the password and 
keys is not recorded.
6 Changing custom macro common variables (#100 to #999)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When bit 3 (HMV) of parameter No. 3196 is 1, changing a custom macro common variable records 
the changed common variable number, the changed common variable value, the new common 
variable value, and the change time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 166 -
Alarm history for peripheral axis control
If an alarm occurs on peripheral axis control 1, the alarm is displayed under "P1" on operation history 
screen as follows. In case of peripheral axis 2 or 3, the alarm is displayed under "P2" or "P3".
Fig.1.10.6.3 (b) Displaying alarm history peripheral axis control (10.4-inch display unit)
Deleting history data on the operation history screen - Procedure
1 Display the operation history screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
3 Press the soft key [ALL CLEAR].
4 If soft key [EXEC] is pressed, all history data is deleted.
NOTE
The delete operation deletes not only operation history, but also external 
operator message history, alarm history, and other history data. Delete operation 
cannot be performed on a per-history-type basis. 
1.10.6.4 Operation history signal selection
An input/output signal for recording history can be selected. A maximum of 60 signals can be set.
Setting data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Setting data
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [OPERAT HISTRY].
4 Press soft key [SIGNAL SELECT] to display the operation history signal selection screen.
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
6 Press cursor movement keys to move the cursor to a desired position.
7 Operate keys to enter the signal type (X, G, F, or Y) followed by the address and press .
Example) Entering G0004 and pressing :


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Then entered signal address "G0004" appears in the ADDRES position and the initial value 
"00000000" is set in the SIGNAL position.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 167 -
8 Select the bit to be recorded as history.
To change all bits of a specified signal address, move the cursor so that all bits are displayed in 
reverse video as "00000000" and then press soft key [ON:1] or [OFF:0] to change the bits to 
"11111111" or "00000000".
To change only a particular bit, move the cursor with cursor movement keys to the bit to 
be changed and then press soft key [ON:1] or [OFF:0] to change the bits to 1 or 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9 A maximum of 60 signals can be selected. It is not necessary to set signals contiguously from No. 1.
NOTE
1 When the operation history signal selection screen is displayed, no history is 
recorded.
2 The addresses that can be set for an input/output signal are X, Y, G, and F only. 
When no data is set, ******** appears. 
3 If all bits are 0 even when an address is set, no history is recorded. 
4 When the ON/OFF width of an input signal is 4 msec or less, nothing is recorded


key: chroma:document
string_value:
in history data. Some signals are not recorded.
5 When the number of selected signals is large, the processing speed may be 
reduced.
Clearing individual data items
1 Display the operation history signal selection screen.
2 Move the cursor to the data to be cleared.
3 Press soft key [DELETE].
4 Press soft key [EXEC].
Clearing all data items
1 Display the operation history signal selection screen.
2 Press soft key [ALLDEL].
3 Press soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 168 -
Selection by the parameter
When bit 4 (PHS) of parameter No. 3206 is 1, an input/output signal for which history is recorded can be 
set by the parameter. 
When a signal is selected or deselected on the operation history signal selection screen in this case, the 
value of the corresponding parameter automatically changes. When the value of the parameter is changed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
on the parameter screen, the display of the operation history signal selection screen changes. 
This is the same as in input operations. When operation history signal selection data is input on the 
operation history signal selection screen, the value of the corresponding parameter automatically changes. 
When the value of parameter is input on the parameter screen, the display of the operation history signal 
selection screen changes.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
selection screen changes. 
The first 20 data items of the 60 data items can be set by the parameter. 
Parameter setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3206 PHS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#4 PHS Operation history signal selection:
0: Does not interact with parameters.
Operation history signal selection is added or deleted on the operation history signal 
selection screen.
Changing the settings of parameters Nos. 24901 to 24920, Nos. 12801 to 12820,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Nos. 12841 to 12860, or Nos. 12881 to 12900 has no effect on operation history 
signal selection.
Changes to the signals of the addresses specified by parameters Nos. 24901 to 24920, 
Nos. 12801 to 12820, Nos. 12841 to 12860, or Nos. 12881 to 12900 are not 
recorded in the history.
1: Interacts with parameters.
Operation history signal selection can be performed either on the operation history 
signal selection screen or by setting parameters.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
Setting this parameter to 1 reflects the current operation history 
signal selection data on parameters Nos. 24901 to 24920 and Nos. 
12801 to 12900.
24901 Operation history signal selection PMC path number (No. 01)
to to
24920 Operation history signal selection PMC path number (No. 20)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
These parameters set operation history signal selection PMC path numbers Nos. 1 to 20.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The correspondence between PMC path numbers and settings is as given in the Table 
1.10.6.4 (a).
Table 1.10.6.4 (a)
PMC path number Parameter value
Not selected. 0
1st PMC 1
2nd PMC 2
3rd PMC 3


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 169 -
These parameters are paired with other parameters as given below (Table 1.10.6.4 (b)).
Table 1.10.6.4 (b)
No. PMC path number Address type Address number Bit number
01 No. 24901 No. 12801 No. 12841 No. 12881
02 No. 24902 No. 12802 No. 12842 No. 12882
03 No. 24903 No. 12803 No. 12843 No. 12883
… … … … …
20 No. 24920 No. 12820 No. 12860 No. 12900
NOTE
1 Operation history signals that can be selected and deselected with


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameters are for the first 20 of 60 sets. If an operation history 
signal is specified from the operation history signal selection 
screen, the PMC path number is fixed at the first PMC.
2 To deselect a signal, set 0.
At this time, 0 is set as the initial value in the address type (Nos. 
12801 to 12820), the address number (Nos. 12841 to 12860), and 
the bit number (Nos. 12881 to 12900) corresponding to that signal.
3 When a PMC path number is set, 1 is set as the initial value in the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
address type (Nos. 12801 to 12820) corresponding to that signal, 
and 0 is set as the initial value in the address number (Nos. 12841 
to 12860) and the bit number (Nos. 12881 to 12900).
[Example]
If parameter No. 24901 is set to 1, the parameters are initialized 
as follows:
 No. 12801=1 Address type
 No. 12841=0 Address number
 No. 12881=00000000 Bit number
If, however, the address type (Nos. 12801 to 12820) corresponding
to that signal is set, the address type (Nos. 12801 to 12820), the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
address number (Nos. 12841 to 12860), and the bit number (Nos. 
12881 to 12900) will not be initialized.
4 If an attempt is made to set a value that cannot be set, a warning, 
"DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" appears; retry setting a value.
12801 Operation history signal selection address type (No. 01)
to to
12820 Operation history signal selection address type (No. 20)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 4


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Valid data range] 0 to 4
These parameters set operation history signal selection address types Nos. 1 to 20.
The correspondence between address types and settings is as given in the Table 1.10.6.4 
(c).
Table 1.10.6.4 (c)
Address type Parameter value
Not selected. 0
X 1
G 2
Y 3
F 4


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 170 -
These parameters are paired with other parameters as given below (Table 1.10.6.4 (d)).
Table 1.10.6.4 (d)
No. PMC path number Address type Address number Bit number
01 No. 24901 No. 12801 No. 12841 No. 12881
02 No. 24902 No. 12802 No. 12842 No. 12882
03 No. 24903 No. 12803 No. 12843 No. 12883
… … … … …
20 No. 24920 No. 12820 No. 12860 No. 12900
NOTE
1 Operation history signals that can be selected and deselected with


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameters are for the first 20 of 60 sets. If an operation history 
signal is specified from the operation history signal selection 
screen, the PMC path number is fixed at the first PMC.
2 To deselect a signal, set 0.
At this time, 0 is set as the initial value in the address number (Nos. 
12841 to 12860) and the bit number (Nos. 12881 to 12900) 
corresponding to that signal.
3 When an address type is set, 1 is set as the initial value in the PMC


key: chroma:document
string_value:
path number (Nos. 24901 to 24920) corresponding to that signal, 
and 0 is set as the initial value in the address number (Nos. 12841 
to 12860) and the bit number (Nos. 12881 to 12900).
[Example]
If parameter No. 12801 is set to 2, the parameters are initialized 
as follows:
No. 24901=1 PMC path number
No. 12841=0 Address number
No. 12881=00000000 Bit number
If, however, the PMC path number (Nos. 24901 to 24920) 
corresponding to that signal is set, the PMC path number (Nos.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
24901 to 24920) will not be initialized.
4 If an attempt is made to set a value that cannot be set, a warning, 
"DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" appears; retry setting a value.
12841 Operation history signal selection address number (No. 01)
to to
12860 Operation history signal selection address number (No. 20)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] For an explanation of the address ranges of the G, F, X, and Y signals, refer to the PMC
Programming Manual (B-64513EN).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
These parameters set operation history signal selection address numbers Nos. 1 to 20.
These parameters are paired with other parameters as given below (Table 1.10.6.4 (e)).
Table 1.10.6.4 (e)
No. PMC path number Address type Address number Bit number
01 No. 24901 No. 12801 No. 12841 No. 12881
02 No. 24902 No. 12802 No. 12842 No. 12882
03 No. 24903 No. 12803 No. 12843 No. 12883
… … … … …
20 No. 24920 No. 12820 No. 12860 No. 12900


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 171 -
NOTE
1 Operation history signals that can be selected and deselected with 
parameters are for the first 20 of 60 sets. 
2 When an address number is set, 0 is set as the initial value in the 
bit number (Nos. 12881 to 12900) corresponding to that signal.
3 If an attempt is made to set a value that cannot be set or if the 
address type (Nos. 12801 to 12820) corresponding to that signal is 
0, a warning, "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" appears; retry setting a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
value.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12881 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0
to to
12900 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
RB7 - RB0 History of the respective operation history signal selection bits Nos. 1 to 20 (RB7 to RB0) 
corresponding to the operation history signal selection addresses set in parameters Nos. 
12801 to 12860 is:
0 : Not retained. (History of the bit is not recorded.)
1 : Retained. (History of the bit is recorded.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
These parameters are paired with other parameters as given below (Table 1.10.6.4 (f)).
Table 1.10.6.4 (f)
No. PMC path number Address type Address number Bit number
01 No. 24901 No. 12801 No. 12841 No. 12881
02 No. 24902 No. 12802 No. 12842 No. 12882
03 No. 24903 No. 12803 No. 12843 No. 12883
… … … … …
20 No. 24920 No. 12820 No. 12860 No. 12900
1.10.6.5 Outputting all history data
All history data items can be output to an external input/output unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
History data items cannot be output individually.
Procedure
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.
2 Enter the EDIT mode.
3 Press function key .
4 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] is displayed.
5 Press soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] and then press soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] that newly appears 
to display the operation history screen. 
6 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
7 Press soft key [F OUTPUT].
8 Enter the file name and press soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When pressing soft key [EXEC] without entering a file name, the name of the output file name is 
"OPRT_HIS.TXT".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 172 -
Output format
History is output as an ASCII file in the following format.
1 MDI key
"MDI" is followed by "path number_", "key data", and "input time".
(The key data that is input during power-on is indicated as "Power on MDI".)
<Example>
MDI 01_A 12:23:34
MDI 02_<CAN> 12:23:34
MDI 02_[SOFT HF1] 12:23:35
MDI P_<RESET> 12:34:56
Power on MDI 01_<RESET> 12:34:56
2 Input/output signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Input/output signal
"DI/DO" is followed by "PMC number_", "signal address bit state", and "change time". 
<Example>
DI/DO 1_F0002.2_on 12:34:56
DI/DO 1_ G0043.0_off G0043.1_off 12:35:00
（Example of the same address and multiple bits）
3 Alarm
"Alarm" is followed by "path number_", "type", "alarm number", "G code modal data", "non-G-code 
modal data", each axis "absolute coordinates", "machine coordinates", and "data and time of 
occurrence".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
occurrence".
The modal data for which a command is present in the block that was being executed during 
occurrence of an alarm is preceded by "*".
<Example>
• Alarm 01_SR01973 
*G0. G97. G69. G99. G21. G50.2 G25. G13.1 B0. D0. E0. *F100. H0. M10. *N123. Test_ 
S1000. T1010.
X1 ABS 197.999 MCN 197.999 Y1 ABS -199806.00 MCN -199806.00 Z1 ABS 297.009 
MCN 0.123 C1 ABS 10395.999 MCN 0.000 at 2007/09/01 19:03:28
• Alarm 02_ OT00506(ZA2)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Alarm 02_ OT00506(ZA2) 
*G1. G17. G90. G22. G94. G20. *G42. G49. G80. G12.1 B0. *D12. E0. *F100. H34. M0. 
*N123. O123 S0. T0.
X2 ABS 123.999 MCN 234.000 Y2 ABS -123.00 MCN -234.00 ZA2 ABS 1234.567 MCN 
–1234.567 at 2007/09/01 12:34:56
• When no additional information is recorded during occurrence of an alarm (bit 7 (HAL) of 
parameter No. 3196 is 1), only "path number_", "alarm number", and "data and time of 
occurrence" are output. 
Alarm 01_OT00506(XC1) at 2007/09/01 22:08:32


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Alarm 02_SW00100 at 2007/09/01 19:07:52
• When external alarm messages and macro alarm messages are recorded (bit 7 (HAL) of 
parameter No. 3196 is 0 and bit 3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112 is 1), the messages are also 
output. 
Alarm 01_MC00001 Message ATC ALARM
G0. G97. G69. G99. G21. G40. G25. G22. G80. D0. E0. F0. H0. M0. N0. O9999 S0. T0.
X2 ABS 10.000 MCN 0.000Y2 ABS 123.000 MCN 0.000Z2 ABS 0.000 MCN 0.000 at 
2007/09/01 10:06:43
4 External operator message


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 External operator message
"EXT_Message" is followed by "message number", "message", and "data and time of occurrence". 
<Example>
EXT_Message 01234 OIL PRESSURE DECREASE at 2007/09/01 2:38:43


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 173 -
5 Changing the tool offset data
"Tool Offset" is followed by "path number", "type", "offset number", "changed offset data", 
"changing offset data", and "change time". The type is described below. 
Common to M/T : G = geometric compensation W = wear compensation
M series : H = tool length compensation D = cutter compensation
T series : R = tool-nose radius compensation T = tool direction
X2, Z2, Y2 = second geometric compensation
<Example>


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<Example>
Tool Offset 01_X0002 0.000 → 1 at 12:15:43
Tool Offset 02_XW0001 -9999.999 → 9999.999 at 12:15:46
Tool Offset 01_RG0032 0.000 → 0.003 at 12:15:52
Tool Offset 02_T0001 5. → 2. at 19:34:11
Tool Offset 02_W0123 -10.000 → 123.456 at 10:28:58 
Tool Offset 01_HG0456 0.000 → 999.999 at 11:37:40
Tool Offset 01_ 0064 12.340 → 12.569 at 11:39:42
6 Changing the workpiece offset/extended workpiece offset/workpiece shift (T series) data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
"Work Offset/EXT Work Offset/Work Shift" is followed by "path number_(axis name)", "type", 
"offset number", "changed offset data", "changing offset data", and "change time".
<Example>
Work Offset 01_G55(XA1) 15.000 → 0.007 at 09:23:03
Work Offset 02_EXT(Z2) 0.000 → 300.003 at 09:22:50
EXT Work Offset 02_G54.1P300 (Y2) 123.456 → 9999.999 at 12:15:46
Work Shift (X) 02_999999.999 → 999999.999 at 10:22:37
7 Changing a parameter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Changing a parameter
"Parameter" is followed by "type", "parameter number", "changed parameter", "changing parameter", 
and "change time".
The type is described below. 
Path type: A path number is preceded by L. 
Axis type: An axis number is preceded by A.
Spindle type: A spindle number of preceded by S. 
Machine group type: A machine group is preceded by T.
Others: No type is output. 
<Example>
Parameter N03112 00000100 → 00001100 at 11:18:40


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameter Path type N01410 L02 0.000 → 1000.000 at 18:58:48
Parameter Axis type N01423 A04(B2) 0.000 → 10000.000 at 18:58:48
Parameter Spindle type N04011 S1(S) 10011010 → 10011010 at 18:58:53
Parameter Machine type N06310 T01 0 → -32768 at 19:21:13
8 Changing custom macro common variables (#100 to #999)
"Macro variable" is followed by "path number", "#variable name", "changed common variable", 
"changing common variable", and "change time".
Variables are output in the data form of M × (10**(-E)).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<Example>
• When #149 of the first path is changed from empty to 12.345
Macro variable 01_#149 Empty → 123450000*(10**-7) at 15:02:35
• When #549 of the second path is changed from -12.345 to 123456789012
Macro variable 02_#549 -123450000*(10**-7) →123456789*(10**3) at 15:03:27


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 174 -
9 Data/time
Power on at 2007/09/01 17:11:17 (Data/time of power-on)
Power off at 2007/09/01 17:49:17 (Data/time of power-off)
Date 2007/09/01 00:00:00 (Record of date change)
Time stamp at 2007/09/01 15:51:00 (Record at certain time intervals)
Data delete at 2007/09/01 10:56:18 (Data/time of history data deletion)
1.11 FSSB CONNECT STATE SCREEN
In FSSB Connect State Screen, the connection state of slave unit in FSSB line can be easily checked.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When FSSB Communication error occurs, the unit where problem occurs is displayed in red.
So, which unit is problem can be easily diagnosed.
Moreover the connection state when system alarm occurs up to two times in the past can be checked.
1.11.1 Display method
The method of displaying the FSSB Connect State Screen is as follows.
(1) Press the function key .
(2) Press the soft key until the soft key [FSSB] is displayed.
(3) Press the soft key [FSSB].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Press the soft key [FSSB].
(4) Press the soft key until the soft key [CONECT STATUS] is displayed.
(5) Press the soft key [CONECT STATUS].
1.11.2 FSSB Communication Error Diagnosis Display
The slave unit and the connector that FSSB communication has established are displayed in blue and the 
slave unit and the connector that FSSB communication has not established by error are displayed in red 
on the FSSB Connect State Screen.
This screen can easily check the part where the problem occurs.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
There is the following kind of FSSB communication error diagnosis displays.
(1) Current Display
(2) Alarm Display
(3) System Alarm History 1 Display
(4) System Alarm History 2 Display
Current display shows the FSSB connection state.
Use Alarm Display when you make a diagnosis of current FSSB alarms.
Use System Alarm History 1 and 2 Display when you make a diagnosis of FSSB alarms that occurred in 
the past.
System Alarm History 1 Display shows the latest alarm log.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
System Alarm History 2 Display shows the alarm log that occurred before the latest one.
System Alarm History 1 and 2 Display are available only if FSSB has been set correctly at least one time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 175 -
1.11.2.1 Current Display
In the current display, the current FSSB connection state is displayed.
This screen can be displayed by soft key [CURRENT].
1.11.2.2 Alarm Display
In the alarm display, the FSSB connection state normally established in the past is compare with the 
current FSSB connection.
And, the different part is displayed in red.
This screen can be displayed by soft key [ALARM].
“FSSB COMMUNICATION ERROR” is displayed in the comment part.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 176 -
1.11.2.3 System Alarm History Display
In the system alarm history display, the FSSB connection state normally established in the past is 
compare with the System alarm history data.
And, the problem part is displayed in red.
This Screen can be displayed by soft key [SYSA HISTORY1] and [SYSA HISTORY2].
The content or time stamp of system alarm history is displayed in the comment part.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The content and time stamp of system alarm history is switched with the soft key [SWITCH].
The content of system alarm history
The time stamp of system alarm history
Abnormal
(Red)
Comment
Soft key [SWITCH]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 177 -
1.12 MAINTENANCE MONITOR
Status of CNC, amplifiers and power supplies necessary for maintenance can be confirmed on this screen. 
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [PUNCH] appears.
3 Press softkey [MAINTE MONITR]
1.12.1 Fan Monitor Screen
When softkey [FAN MONITOR] is pressed, the Fan monitor screen is displayed. It is possible to confirm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
it bringing the state of the fan of CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, and power supply together. 
Please confirm this screen when "FAN" is displayed in status display, and examine by which fan fault
occurred. 
The fan of CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, and power supply are displayed as shown in the 
figure below. 
FSSB Connection diagram
The FSSB connection diagram is scrolled right and left with key. When key is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
pressed, the FSSB connection diagram is scrolled to the left and the right the triplex row. 
CNC
Common Power
Supply Connection
diagram
FSSB Connection
diagram
(Servo amplifier, 
Spindle amplifier)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 178 -
Common Power Supply Connection diagram
Up to two internal cooler fans and two radiators cooler fans are connected in a common power supply. 
The characters of "PS" that shows a common power supply and the amplifier group number displayed in 
the upper part of figure in a common power supply.
Servo amplifiers or spindle amplifiers connected with a common power supply has a same group number.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the power supply is selected with key, servo amplifiers and spindle amplifiers 
connected with the selected power supply are highlighted in yellow. 
Fan status
: NORMAL Fans are rotating normally. 
: EXCHANGE Fault occurs in the fan or the lifetime approaches. Please exchange the fan. 
NOTE
1 When FSSB is not correctly connected, this screen is not normally displayed. 
2 When the fan is not connected, the state of the fan is a blank.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 This screen is not updated automatically. Please switch the screen when you 
want to update the state of the fan. 
1.12.2 Leakage Detection Monitor Screen
When softkey [LEAKG MONITR] is pressed, the Leakage detection monitor screen is displayed. The 
leakage status of servo amplifier and spindle amplifier can be confirmed on this screen. When "LKG" is 
displayed in status display, confirm this screen and examine the part where axis fault occurred. 
Internal cooler fan
Radiator cooler fan


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 179 -
Leakage status
: NORMAL The insulation resistance is normal. 
: LEAKAGE The insulation resistance has dropped. Be sure to perform inspection. 
: FAILED It failed in the measurement of the insulation resistance. Be sure to perform 
inspection. 
-- : UNSUPPORT The servo amplifier and the spindle amplifier used cannot use the Leakage 
Detection Function. 
** : UNMEASUR Leakage has not been measured yet.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Refer to diagnosis data No.1700, No.1701 (servo), No.1702 and No.1703 (spindle) for details. 
NOTE
1 When FSSB is not correctly connected, this screen is not normally displayed. 
2 This screen is not updated automatically. Please switch the screen when you
want to update the state of the fan.
1.13 SYSTEM ALARM HISTORY SCREEN
On the system alarm history screen, a maximum of two system alarms that occurred can be displayed. In 
addition, system alarm information can be output to an external unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 180 -
1.13.1 System Alarm History List Screen
The system alarm history list screen lists the system alarms history items that are currently recorded, as 
shown in Fig. 1.13.1 (a). 
A maximum of two system alarm information items including the latest system alarm information can be 
displayed by setting bit 2 (NMH) of parameter No. 3103. 
Fig. 1.13.1 (a) System alarm history list screen
The following information is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1) Date and time of system alarm issuance
(2) System alarm number
(3) System alarm message
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [SYSALM HIS.] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [SYSALM HIS.].
4 The system alarm history list screen as shown in Fig. 1.13.1 (a) appears.
(1)
(2) (3)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 181 -
1.13.2 System Alarm History Detail Screen
This screen displays details on system alarms. Page switching keys , can be used to switch
between pages to be displayed.
Fig. 1.13.2 (a) System alarm history detail screen
Procedure
1 On the system alarm history list screen, move the cursor with and to the system alarm 
history for which detailed information is to be displayed. 
2 Press [INPUT] key or soft key [(OPRT)] and then press soft key [SELECT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Details of the selected system alarm history are displayed. 
To move from the system alarm history detail screen to the list screen, follow the steps below. 
1 On the system alarm history detail screen, press soft key [(OPRT)] and then press [RETURN]. 
2 The system alarm history list screen appears. 
1.13.3 Outputting System Alarm History
This section describes the procedure for outputting system alarm history to an external unit.
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure
1 On the system alarm history detail screen, press soft key [(OPRT)] and press soft key [F OUTPUT].
2 Enter the name of a file to which history is output. If no file name is specified, the default file name 
(SYS-ALM.TXT) is assumed.
3 Press soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 182 -
1.13.4 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3103 NMH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#2 NMH System alarm history screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
1.14 MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION
1.14.1 Overview
This function monitors state of machine.
When trouble of the machine occurs, CNC information such as the operation history, the position and the 
feedrate at that time are saved in the CNC memory.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The saved CNC information can be used to investigate the cause of machine trouble.
A ladder program made by machine tool builders make monitors the state of machine.
In the ladder program, the shock value and the abnormal load torque are monitored by using the detection 
of CNC alarm, the Multi-Sensor Unit (MSU) and the unexpected disturbance torque detection function.
When trouble of the machine such as the spindle collision occurs, the ladder program notifies CNC that 
the trouble has occurred.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the trouble has occurred.
When CNC is notified by the signal, CNC saves the information on that time in the CNC memory.
Machine tool builders or maintenance members investigate the cause of generation of trouble by using the 
saved CNC information.
The maximum save number of CNC information is 100. So, the past trouble can be investigated.
PMC CNC
Ladder Program
Collision of 
Spindle
Multi-Sensor 
Unit
(Option)
Unexpected 
disturbance 
torque detection 
function
(Option)
Machine State


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Option)
Machine State 
Monitoring Function
Information Save
- Position/Feedrate
- Mode
- Sensor Value
- Operation History
- Program name
Investigation 
using by saved 
CNC Information
Monitoring 
Shock Sensor 
Notice to CNC
Monitoring Load 
Torque
Notice to CNC
Monitoring CNC 
Alarm 
Notice to CNC
CNC Alarm
Fig.1.14.1 (a) Summary of machine state monitoring function (Ex. collision of spindle)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 183 -
Machine state monitoring function has the following two screens.
(1) Machine state monitoring screen
(2) Machine state history screen
In the machine state monitoring screen, four bytes PMC signals that set by parameter and the signal of the 
Multi-Sensor Unit can be monitored.
In the machine state history screen, saved CNC state and signal value can be displayed. So, the signal of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Multi-Sensor Unit and the CNC state such as position and program at the time when a spindle collides 
can be checked.
In addition, displayed information can be output to external devices.
When CNC saved information exceeded 100, CNC information is overwritten from the old one. CNC 
Information is remained for eight days or more, so saving information is restricted.
This function is the optional. 
NOTE
Multi-Sensor Unit and unexpected disturbance torque detection function are the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
optional. Please refer to the following manuals for details.
⋅ Multi-Sensor Unit:
Multi-Sensor Unit CONNECTION MANUAL (A-97201EN)
⋅ Unexpected Disturbance Torque Detection Function:
FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus (FUNCTION) (B-64693EN-1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 184 -
1.14.2 Machine state monitoring screen
In the machine state monitoring screen, four PMC signals that set by parameter and the signal of the 
Multi-Sensor Unit can be monitored.
The machine state monitoring screen is displayed by the following procedures.
1. Press function key .
2. Press the continuous menu key several times to display the soft key [MACHIN MONITR]
3. Press the soft key [MACHIN MONITR] to display the machine state monitoring screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 1.14.2 (a) Machine state monitoring screen(With Multi-Sensor Unit)
NOTE
This screen is displayed only when bit 3 (MSM) of parameter No.11372 is 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 185 -
1.14.2.1 Monitoring of PMC signals
In the machine state monitoring screen, four PMC signals that set by parameter can be monitored.
Fig. 1.14.2.1 (a) Monitoring of PMC signals
Details of the content of the display are as follows.
PMC Signal Title
The title of PMC signal that can be set by the parameter is displayed.
The PMC signal can be set only by four bytes or less.
PMC Signal Address
The address of PMC signal set by the parameter is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the parameter is not set, “****” is displayed.
In the case of multi PMC system, the PMC path number is displayed ahead of the address. (Refer to Fig. 
1.14.2.1 (b))
PMC Signal Value
The real-time value of PMC signal set by the parameter is displayed.
If the parameter is not set, “****” is displayed.
Fig. 1.14.2.1 (b) PMC Signal Value
Title
Signal Value
Signal Address
Parameter is not set
PMC path number
(Multi PMC system)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 186 -
1.14.2.2 With Multi-Sensor Unit
When Multi-Sensor Unit is connected, machine state monitoring screen is displayed as follows.
Fig. 1.14.2.2(a) With Multi-Sensor Unit
Details of the content of the display are as follows.
Multi-Sensor Unit Title
The title of Multi-Sensor Unit title is displayed.
For the multi PMC system
In the case of multi PMC system, the PMC path number of the Multi-Sensor Unit is displayed next to the 
title.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
title.
Fig. 1.14.2.2 (b) Multi PMC System
For the plural Multi-Sensor Units
The Multi-Sensor Unit can be connected up to four.
In the case of the plural Multi-Sensor Units, the displayed Multi-Sensor Unit number (MSU No.) and all 
connected number of MSU are displayed.
The Multi-Sensor Unit number is counted from the one near CNC to four among units connected with I/O 
Link.
Fig. 1.14.2.2 (c) plural Multi-Sensor Units
Title
Sensor Item
Signal Address
Value
Unit
Title
Signal Value


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 187 -
For multi PMC system and the plural Multi-Sensor Units
In the case of multi PMC system and the plural Multi-Sensor Units, the displayed MSU No, all connected 
number of MSU and the PMC path number of the Multi-Sensor Units are displayed next to the title.
Fig. 1.14.2.2 (d) Multi PMC System and plural Multi-Sensor Units
Sensor Item
The following sensor items are displayed.
(1) Shock Sensor (Direction of X, Y, Z) : 2CH
(2) Analog Input : 2CH


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(2) Analog Input : 2CH
(3) Thermo Sensor : 8CH
When all sensors cannot be displayed in one screen, the page can be switched by pushing page change 
key .
Address
The address corresponding to each sensor is displayed.
Value
The sensor value that each sensor outputs is displayed.
Unit
The unit corresponding to each sensor is displayed.
PMC Signal Title
Refer to “Monitoring of PMC signals”.
PMC Signal Address
Refer to “Monitoring of PMC signals”.
PMC Signal Value


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 188 -
Operation
If the soft key [(OPRT)] is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed.
Fig. 1.14.2.2 (e) soft key [(OPRT)]
Soft Key [MSU SWITCH]
This soft key is displayed when the plural Multi-Sensor Units are connected.
When this soft key is pressed, the displayed Multi-Sensor Units can be switched.
For example, when four Multi-Sensor Units are connected, whenever this soft key is pushed, the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed Multi-Sensor Unit changes as MSU No.1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 1…
Soft Key [SIGNAL SWITCH]
When this soft key is pressed, either display of X or Y signal can be switched.
 X signal display Y signal display [SIGNAL SWITCH]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 189 -
Page Change Key
When the page change key is pressed, the sensor signal information of the next page can be 
displayed.
 Page 1 Page 2
1.14.3 Machine state history screen
When the machine state history save request signal MSUSRQ<G0534.6> becomes “1”, CNC saves the 
PMC signal, the state of CNC and the operation history in CNC as a history.
In the machine state history screen, these saved histories can be displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
As a result, the machine state at the time when a spindle collides can be checked and the investigation of 
cause of trouble and restoration are easy.
The histories can be saved up to 100.
NOTE
1 If the request signal becomes “1” when the 100 of history data have been saved, 
the new history overwrites the oldest one.
2 Don’t set the machine state history save request signal MSUSRQ to “1” while the 
machine state history screen is displayed. In this case, CNC Information is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
saved when the display of the screen changes other screen.
The state of CNC saved as a history is as follows.
Table 1.14.3 (a) Saved CNC Information List
Item Remarks
Time Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second
PMC Signal 4bytes
Machine Position All Axis, All Path
Absolute Position All Axis, All Path
Feedrate All Path
Spindle Speed All Axis, All Path
Program Name (O Number) Executing program name, All Path
Block Number Block number of executing program, All Path
Mode All Path


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 190 -
Item Remarks
Operation History Data of 1/20 of normal operation history. About 400 MDI keys.
The number of MDI keys decreases when a history with large size such 
as the alarm history is saved.
Non-Save Number Number of information not saved.
Multi-Sensor Unit Signals Maximum 4
The machine state history screen is composed by the following screens:
(A) Machine state history list screen
(B) Machine state history CNC data screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(C) Machine state history operation history screen
The machine state history list screen is displayed by the following procedures.
1. Press function key .
2. Continuous menu key [+] several times to display the soft key [MACHIN HISTORY]
3. Press the soft key [MACHIN HISTORY].
4. Press the soft key [LIST], and machine state history list screen is displayed.
5. Press the soft key [CNC DATA], and CNC data screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTORY] to display the operation history screen is displayed.
1.14.3.1 Machine State History List Screen
The machine state history list screen is composed by the following area.
(1) Common area
(2) History list area
(3) Detail data area
Fig. 1.14.3.1 (a) Machine State History List Screen
In common area, common information such as the detect time and non-save number of the selection 
history number is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
history number is displayed.
In history list area, the detect time of all the histories saved in CNC is displayed in the list.
In detail data area, the detail data of the selection history number is displayed.
The following kind of detail data can be displayed.
Common
area
History
list area
Detail data
area


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 191 -
(a) Signal information
(b) CNC information
(c) Operation history information
These kinds can be selected by cursor key or .
Fig. 1.14.3.1 (b) Machine State History List Screen (List + Signal)
Fig. 1.14.3.1 (c) Machine State History List Screen (List + CNC)
Fig. 1.14.3.1 (d) Machine State History List Screen (List + Operation History)
MDI Key 
MDI Key 
Signal Information
CNC Information
Operation History 
Information
History List 
MDI Key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 192 -
Common Information
Common information is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
Fig. 1.14.3.1 (e) Common Area
(1) Displayed history number
The selected history number is displayed.
(2) Total history number
The total number of machine state histories saved in CNC is displayed.
(3) Detect time
The time that the machine state history save request signal MSUSRQ<G0534.6> becomes “1” and 
the history was saved is displayed.
(4) Path number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(4) Path number
In the case of multi path system, the path number of the displayed history is displayed.
(5) Non-Save Number
Non-Save Number is displayed.
When Non-Save Number is 0, it is not displayed on screen.
The maximum value of Non-Save Number is 65535.
Detect Time Path Number (Multi Path System)
Displayed History Number
Total History Number
Non-Save 
Number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 193 -
History List information
The history list information is displayed in the area in the left half of the machine state history list screen.
If Non-Save Number is not 0, the color of the character is changing purple and “*” is displayed.
Fig. 1.14.3.1 (f) History List Area
Operation in History List Area
(1) Cursor Key and Page Change Key
The cursor is moved up and down by the cursor key and page change key ,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and the displayed history number can be changed.
(2) Soft Key [REC TOP] and [REC END]
If the soft key [REC TOP] is pressed, the oldest history number is displayed.
If the soft key [REC END] is pressed, the latest history number is displayed.
(3) Soft Key [F OUTPUT]
When the emergency stop sate or EDIT mode is entered and the soft key [F OUTPUT] is pressed, 
the following soft keys are displayed.
When any file name is input and the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, all the histories saved in CNC are


key: chroma:document
string_value:
output.
If no name is input and the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, file name is “MSRHSTRY.TXT”
History Number Detect Time
Non-Save Number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 194 -
Signal Information
The signal information is displayed in the area in the right half of the machine state history list screen.
The signal information of selected number history is displayed.
Fig. 1.14.3.1 (g) Signal Information
The content of the display and the operation are similar to the machine state monitoring screen.
Refer to“Monitoring of PMC signals”, “With Multi-Sensor Unit”.
CNC Information


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC Information
The CNC information is displayed in the area in the right half of the machine state history list screen.
The CNC information of selected number history is displayed.
Fig. 1.14.3.1 (h) CNC Information
Machine Position Absolute Position
Feedrate
Program
Mode
Spindle Speed
Block Number
Modal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 195 -
(1) Machine Position
Machine position is displayed.
When the number of control axis is six or more, if the soft key [AXIS SWITCH] is pressed then the 
axis since the sixth axis is displayed.
(2) Absolute Position
Absolute position is displayed.
When the number of control axis is six or more, if the soft key [AXIS SWITCH] is pressed then the 
axis since the sixth axis is displayed.
(3) Feedrate
Feedrate is displayed.
(4) Spindle Speed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(4) Spindle Speed
Spindle speed is displayed.
When the number of spindle is two or more, if the soft key [SPINDLE SWITCH] is pressed then the 
spindle since the second spindle is displayed.
(5) Mode
Mode is displayed.
(6) Modal
Modal is displayed.
The modal that can be displayed is M, S, T, and B.
Operation in CNC Information
(1) Soft Key [AXIS SWITCH]
When the number of control axis is six or more, the soft key [AXIS SWITCH] is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If this soft key is pressed, the positions of the sixth and after axes are displayed in the machine and 
absolute coordinates.
(2) Soft Key [SPINDLE SWITCH]
When the number of spindle is two or more, the soft key [SPINDLE SWITCH] is displayed.
If this soft key is pressed, the speed of the second and after spindles is displayed.
(3) Soft Key [PATH SWITCH]
When the number of paths are two or more, the soft key [PATH SWITCH] is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 196 -
Operation History Information
The operation history information is displayed in the right half of the machine state history list screen.
The operation history until the time that the selected history was saved is displayed.
The operation history is saved about 400 MDI keys.
Fig. 1.14.3.1 (i) Operation History Information
Operation in Operation History Information
(1) Soft Key [TOP]
The oldest operation history is displayed.
(2) Soft Key [BOTTOM]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(2) Soft Key [BOTTOM]
The newest operation history is displayed.
(3) Soft Key [Prev Page]
The previous page is displayed.
(4) Soft Key [Next Page]
The next page is displayed.
Operation History
Total Operation History 
Number Displayed Top Operation
History Number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 197 -
1.14.3.2 Machine State History CNC Data Screen
In the machine state history CNC data screen, the common information, the signal information and CNC 
information are displayed together.
If the soft key [CNC DATA] is pressed, the machine state history CNC data screen is displayed.
Fig. 1.14.3.2 CNC Data Screen
Refer to “Machine State History List Screen” for each information.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 198 -
1.14.3.3 Machine State History Operation History Screen
In the machine state history operation history screen, the common information and operation history 
information are displayed together.
If the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] is pressed, the machine state history operation history screen is 
displayed.
The operation history information is displayed in the full screen.
Fig. 1.14.3.3 Operation History Screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 199 -
1.14.3.4 Output CNC Information
When the soft key [F OUTPUT] is pressed in the machine state history list screen, all history saved in 
CNC is output.
The composition of the output file is as follows.
HEADER
HISTORY DATA 1
HISTORY DATA 2
HISTORY DATA N
：
Fig. 1.14.3.4 (a) The composition of the output file
Header
In the header, total history number and file information is output. The file information is for maintenance.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NUMBER OF HISTORY : 010 ← Total history number
FILE INFORMATION : 1-100-10-9 ← File Information (For maintenance)
History Data
In the history data, history number, detect time, Non-Save Number, Multi-Sensor Unit data, PMC signal, 
CNC data, operation history and auxiliary information are output.
(1) History number, detect time and Non-Save Number.
The history number and the detect time are output as follows.
[HISTORY NO.001]-------------------------------- ← History Number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DETECT TIME : 2010/03/10 21:15:07 ← Detect Time
NON-SAVE NO. : 00025 ← Non-Save Number
(2) Multi-Sensor Unit Data
The Multi-Sensor Unit data is output as follows. In the case of the plural Multi-Sensor Units, all 
Multi-Sensor Unit data are output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 200 -
MULTI SENSOR UNIT DATA : 
<MULTI SENSOR UNIT NO.1> 
SHOCK1 X (X00000) : 0.0 [G]
SHOCK1 Y (X00002) : 0.0 [G]
SHOCK1 Z (X00004) : 29.9 [G]
SHOCK2 X (X00006) : 1.9 [G]
SHOCK2 Y (X00008) : 0.0 [G]
SHOCK2 Z (X00010) : 0.0 [G]
COMMON1 (X00012) : 0 [-]
COMMON2 (X00014) : 0 [-]
TEMP1 (X00016) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP2 (X00018) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP3 (X00020) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP4 (X00022) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP5 (X00024) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP6 (X00026) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP7 (X00028) : 0.0 [C]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
TEMP7 (X00028) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP8 (X00030) : 0.0 [C]
(Y00000) : -30656
(Y00002) : 0
(Y00004) : 0
(Y00006) : 0
(Y00008) : 16
(Y00010) : 0
(Y00012) : 0
(Y00014) : 0
(Y00016) : 0
(Y00018) : 0
(Y00020) : 0
(Y00022) : 0
(Y00024) : 0
(Y00026) : 0
(Y00028) : 0
(Y00030) : 0
(3) PMC Signal
The PMC signal is output as follows.
Single PMC System
PMC SIGNAL DATA :
 X00000 0x3F 
 X00001 0x04 Y00000 0x00 
 Y00008 0xF0
Multi PMC System:
PMC SIGNAL DATA :
 1:X00000 0x3F


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1:X00000 0x3F 
 1:X00001 0x04 1:Y00000 0x00 1:Y00008 0xF0
(4) CNC Data
The CNC data is output as follows. In the case of multi path system all path data are output.
CNC DATA :


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 201 -
<<MACHINE>>
X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000
<<ABSOLUTE>> 
X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000
<<FEED RATE>>
F 0
<<SPINDLE SPEED>>
S 0
<<PROGRAM>>
//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O123
<<BLOCK>>
0
<<MODE>> 
MEM
<<MODAL>>
M 0
S 0
T 0
B 0
(5) Operation History
The operation history is output as follows.
OPERATION HISTORY :
MDI 01_[RIGHT F] 12:02:13
MDI 01_[RIGHT F] 12:02:14
MDI 01_[RIGHT F] 12:02:15
MDI 01_[RIGHT F] 12:02:15
MDI 01_[SOFT HF7] 12:02:16


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MDI 01_[SOFT HF7] 12:02:16 
MDI 01_<Cursor Down> 12:02:26
MDI 01_<Cursor Down> 12:02:26
:
(6) Auxiliary Information
The auxiliary information is output. This information is for maintenance.
AUX INFO : 
0-10


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 202 -
1.15 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1.15.1 Outline
Investigating the cause of Servo/Spindle/CNC alarms becomes easier by diagnosis according to the 
guidance message of this function.
And when the thermal simulation or disturbance level of servo axis exceeds the trouble forecast level, the 
machine can be safely stopped by detecting the breakdown beforehand by the use of the trouble forecast 
signal.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
signal.
It introduces the example of the method of pursuing the cause of the alarm occurrence that uses the 
trouble diagnosis function as follows.
When alarm "SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP)" is occurred. It explains the procedure of the cause investigation when following alarm "SV0410 EXCESS ERROR 
(STOP)" is occurred.
Fig.1.15.1 (a) Alarm message screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The cause of occurrence is pursued by answering the question displayed on the screen according to the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
following procedures by soft key [YES] or [NO] though there are some occurrence factors of the alarm
"SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP)".
1 After pushing return soft key [<], press the continuous menu key until soft key 
[GUIDE]/[MONIT]/[W.GRPH] appears.
2 Press soft key [GUIDE].
Fig.1.15.1 (b) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 203 -
Because the following screens are displayed, press soft key [YES].
Fig.1.15.1 (c) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The following guidances are displayed.
Fig.1.15.1 (d) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Trouble diagnosis graphic screen is displayed according to the above guidance and the torque command 
is confirmed.
Trouble diagnosis graphic screen is displayed according to the following procedures.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press return soft key [<].
2 Press soft key [W.GRPH].
Fig.1.15.1 (e) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Press soft key [W.PRM].
Fig.1.15.1 (f) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis parameter screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 204 -
A necessary parameter for the graphic display is set as follows.
Fig.1.15.1 (g) Trouble diagnosis parameter screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The displayed axis is selected by inputting the index of an axis to the box next to "AXIS".
The displayed data kind is selected by inputting data kind number to the box next to "DATA KIND".
This time, "1" is set in the index of an axis to confirm the waveform of the torque command of the X1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
axis and "6" is set to data kind number.
Trouble diagnosis graphic screen is displayed according to the following procedures.
1 Press return soft key [<].
2 Press soft key [G-ADJ.].
Fig.1.15.1 (h) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The graphical chart of the torque command immediately before occurring the alarm as follows is 
displayed.
The vertical line shown by the arrow on a right edge is time that the alarm is occurred.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig.1.15.1 (i) Trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Time that alarm is occurred
Data of graphic display
Time that alarm is occurred


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 205 -
Return to trouble diagnosis guidance screen, and press the soft key [NO], because it can be judged that 
the torque command doesn't vibrate from this graphical chart.
Trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed according to the following procedures.
1. Press return soft key [<].
2. Press soft key [GUIDE].
Fig.1.15.1 (j) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press soft key [NO] after pressing the soft key [(OPRT)] on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
Fig.1.15.1 (k) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
When soft key [NO] is pressed, the following guidances are displayed.
Fig.1.15.1 (l) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The cause of the alarm is specified like this, and cope according to the content of the guidance.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 206 -
1.15.2 Investigation Procedure of Cause of Alarm Occurrence
The cause of occurrence can be investigated according to the following procedures when Servo/Spindle 
alarms are occurred.
NOTE
Status display of the trouble diagnosis screen should be [SAMPLING] to diagnose 
it when the servo alarm/spindle alarm is occurred.
Change in the state of [SAMPLING] surely referring to "Clear of preserved data"


key: chroma:document
string_value:
in “Trouble Diagnosis Monitor Screen” when status display is not [SAMPLING].
Investigation procedure (for 10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
1. Press function key , and the message screen is displayed.
2. After pushing return soft key [<], press the continuous menu key until soft key 
[GUIDE]/[MONIT]/[W.GRPH] appears.
3. Press soft key [GUIDE].
The trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed.
The guidance to specify the cause of the occurred alarm is displayed on the trouble diagnosis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
guidance screen.
The cause of occurrence and the coping method of the alarm are displayed by answering in soft key 
[YES]/[NO] referring to servo/spindle monitor information on the trouble diagnosis monitor screen, 
the waveform data of the trouble diagnosis graphic screen, and the diagnosis screen, etc.
Investigation procedure (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1. Press function key , and the message screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [GUIDE]/[MONIT]/[W.GRPH]
appears.
3. Press the vertical soft key [GUIDE].
The trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed.
The guidance to specify the cause of the occurred alarm is displayed on the trouble diagnosis 
guidance screen.
The cause of occurrence and the coping method of the alarm are displayed by answering in 
horizontal soft key [YES]/[NO] referring to servo/spindle monitor information on the trouble


key: chroma:document
string_value:
diagnosis monitor screen, the waveform data of the trouble diagnosis graphic screen, and the 
diagnosis screen, etc.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 207 -
1.15.3 Trouble Diagnosis Guidance Screen
Outline
The trouble diagnosis guidance screen displays the guidance message to specify the cause of an alarm.
The cause of the alarm can be specified by confirmation/coping according to the guidance, and answering 
by soft key [YES]/[NO] in a short time.
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis guidance screen (for 10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [GUIDE] appears.
3 Press soft key [GUIDE]. The trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed as follows.
Fig.1.15.3 (a) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis guidance screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [GUIDE] appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press the vertical soft key [GUIDE]. The trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed.
Explanation
- Contents of Display
Trouble Code : "NC"-"Alarm type + alarm number" is displayed as code for identifing alarm.
Contents of Trouble : Alarm Message.
Probable Cause : Probable Cause of alarm.
Guidance message : Question to find the cause or answer to remove trouble is displayed.
Status display :
[RESUMING] :
When press soft key [RESUME] , the guidance message which was displayed before CNC


key: chroma:document
string_value:
power turned off is displayed again. Then [RESUMING] appears.
Trouble Code
Contents of trouble
Probable cause
Guidance message
Status display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 208 -
[SAMPLING] / [LATCHED] :
In CNC, there are two states in the state that the state (sampling state) to sample servo/spindle 
data whenever it usually operates and servo/spindle alarm are occurred and the sampling stops 
(preserved state). [SAMPLING] or [LATCHED] display show the two states.
The sampling of servo/spindle monitor data is stopped when the servo/spindle alarm is occurred, 
and the data when the alarm is occurred is kept in CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
It is automatically diagnosed that it switches to the trouble diagnosis guidance screen in 
[LATCHED] state after the alarm is occurred, and the diagnosis to servo/spindle alarm is 
displayed partially in CNC based on servo/spindle data when the alarm is occurred.
There is a possibility that a correct diagnosis cannot be done when the alarm number diagnosed 
on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen and the alarm number when monitor data was


key: chroma:document
string_value:
preserved when the alarm is occurred are different when the alarm is occurred next if the 
sampling is not begun. In this case, the display of [LATCHED] state blinks.
Clear the kept data on the screen of either the trouble diagnosis guidance screen, the trouble
diagnosis monitor screen, or the trouble diagnosis graphic screen to begin the sampling again in 
preparation for the alarm occurred next after status display changes into [LATCHED] state


key: chroma:document
string_value:
once. after diagnosing the cause of occurrence and the corrective action of the alarm.
When the kept data is cleared, [LATCHED] state changes into [SAMPLING] state, and restarts 
the sampling of servo/spindle monitor data.
Operation
Press the soft key [(OPRT)] on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen. (Only for 10.4-inch display unit)
- Change of Guidance
Soft key [YES]/[NO] :
Check contents of guidance message, and, answer by pressing soft key [YES] or [NO]. Then the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
next guidance message is displayed.
In some cases CNC automatically checks and judges contents of guidance. In this case the next 
guidance message is automatically displayed.
Automatic diagnosis is not done in case that CNC power turns off once after servo /spindle monitor 
data is kept.
Soft key [BACK] :
Guidance message returns back 1 step. 
It is possible to trace back the guidance message when soft key [YES]/[NO] is pressed by mistake.
Soft key [RESUME] :


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Soft key [RESUME] :
Guidance message which was displayed before CNC power turned off is displayed again.
The diagnosis can be continued from the guidance displayed again.
However, it is not possible to go back to the step before the point where soft key [BACK] is pressed.
Status display “RESUMING” is displayed during the guidance that starts by pressing soft key 
[RESUME].
- Change of alarm
When several alarms occur in same time, pressing page key / can select the guidance 
message.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 209 -
1.15.4 Trouble Diagnosis Monitor Screen
Outline
Trouble diagnosis monitor screen displays information when the alarm is occurred necessary to diagnose 
the servo/spindle alarm.
Servo/spindle monitor data on "1-4 immediately before occurrence of the alarm" for four samplings 
immediately before and "The latest alarm is occurred" can be displayed as data when the alarm is 
occurred.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
occurred.
Moreover, "Present" of servo/spindle monitor data when usually operating can be displayed.
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis monitor screen (for 10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MONIT] appears.
3 Press soft key [MONIT].
The following screen is sample of displaying data of X axis (servo) when the alarm occurred.
Fig.1.15.4 (a) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 The servo monitor data screen and the spindle monitor data screen can be switched by pushing soft
key [MON_SP] / [MON_SV].
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis monitor screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MONIT] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [MONIT].
4 The servo monitor data screen and the spindle monitor data screen can be switched by pushing the 
vertical soft key [MON_SP] / [MON_SV].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 210 -
Explanation
- Data displayed in monitor Screen
Displayed data in monitor screen is showed below.
Table 1.15.4 (a) Data of servo motor
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page 
number
COMMAND PULSE (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
F.B. PULSE (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 (Note3) 1
REF.COUNTER (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
POS. ERROR (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
ACTUAL SPEED (1/min) Word -32768 ~ +32767 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
AMR DATA Word 0~+255 Data of pole position of the rotor 
“256” shows 360 degree as 
electrical angle
1
TORQUE COMMAND (%) Word ±400 Torque command. “100” shows 
maximum torque
2
EFFECTIVE CURRENT (%) Word ±400 “100” shows maximum current of 
amplifier
2
MOTOR CURRENT (A) Word ±4096 2
DISTURBANCE LEVEL (%) Word 0 ~ +200 “100” shows the alarm level of 
Unexpected disturbance torque 
detection function
2
HEAT SIMULATION (%) Word 0 ~ +100 “100” shows the alarm level of 
OVC alarm.
2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OVC alarm.
2
DC LINK VOLT. (V) Word 0 ~ +1023 Instantaneous value(Note3) 3(Note6)
PS VOLTAGE RMS (Vrms) Word 0 ~ +1023 Average value during 1 cycle of 
power source(Note3)
3(Note6)
PS VOLT.UMBALANCE (%) Word 0 ~ +15.5 Average value during 1 cycle of 
power source(Note3)
3(Note6)
PS VOLTAGE THD (%) Word 0 ~ +31.5 Average value of THD(Total 
Harmonic Distortion) during 1 
cycle of power frequency(Note3)
3(Note6)
PS CURRENT (A) Word 0 ~ +2047 Average value of current


key: chroma:document
string_value:
amplitude during 1 cycle of power 
source(Note3)
3(Note6)
PS STATUS FLAG 1 Bit 0 / 1 (Note4) 3(Note6)
PS STATUS FLAG 2 Bit 0 / 1 (Note4) 3(Note6)
PS STATUS FLAG 3 Bit 0 / 1 (Note4) 3(Note6)
PS STATUS FLAG 4 Bit 0 / 1 (Note4) 3(Note6)
PS INPUT FREQ (Hz) Word 0 ~ +102.3 Average value during 1 cycle of 
power source(Note3)
3(Note6)
SV INS.INFO. Byte 0 ~ 3F Various status flags at using 
Leakage detection function
4(Note6)
SV INS.RESISTANCE (MΩ) Word 0 ~ +102.1 Value of insulation resistance at


key: chroma:document
string_value:
using Leakage detection 
function(Note3)
4(Note6)
PS INT.TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5(Note6)
PS HEAT SINK TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5(Note6)
SV INT.TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5(Note6)
SV HEAT SINK TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5(Note6)
AMP GROUP/SLAVE Byte 0 ~ +255 Group number and Slave number 
of power supply (PS)
5(Note6)
PS DGN.INFO. Word 0 ~ FFFF Status flags of power supply(PS) 5(Note6)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 211 -
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page 
number
AMP COMM.ERR.INF. Word 0 ~ FFFF Error information flags for 
communication between 
amplifiers
5(Note6)
SV DGN.INFO. Word 0 ~ FFFF Diagnosis flags for servo 
amplifier(SV)
5(Note6)
SV FSSB UPR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6(Note6)
SV FSSB LWR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6(Note6)
SV FSSB UPR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6(Note6)
SV FSSB LWR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6(Note6)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
SDU FSSB UPR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6(Note6)
SDU FSSB LWR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6(Note6)
SDU FSSB UPR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6(Note6)
SDU FSSB LWR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6(Note6)
INT.DTCT.INTP.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of data interpolation 
when the feedback data of 
internal detector is disturbed by 
noise
7(Note7)
INT.DTCT.COM.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of communication 
error when the feedback data of 
internal detector is disturbed by 
noise
7(Note7)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
noise
7(Note7)
INT.DETECTOR WRN. Word 0 ~ FFFF Warning information of internal 
detector
7(Note6)
EXT.DTCT.INTP.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of data interpolation 
when the feedback data of 
external detector is disturbed by 
noise
7(Note7)
EXT.DTCT.COM.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of communication 
error when the feedback data of 
external detector is disturbed by 
noise
7(Note7)
EXT.DETECTOR WRN. Word 0 ~ FFFF Warning information of external 
detector
7(Note6)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
detector
7(Note6)
SV DATA 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 7(Note6)
SV DATA 2 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 7(Note6)
SV DATA 3 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 7(Note6)
SV DATA 4 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 7(Note6)
NOTE
1 The data range shows the range in which a data can be monitored in this 
function. It doesn’t show the system efficiency or rated value.
2 ARBITRARY DATA1,2 and SV DATA1-4 are used for service operation by 
FANUC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FANUC.
3 The displayed values as Voltage, Current, Frequency, Resistance, and 
Temperature are approximate value and they have some error. If you want to 
know the precise values, please measure them by exclusive equipments. 
4 PS STATUS FLAG1-4 are used for service operation by FANUC.
5 FSSB ERROR and FSSB JITTER show the status of FSSB communication. 
They are used for service operation by FANUC.
6 These items are not displayed in the system of G321 and 31 G331.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 212 -
Table 1.15.4 (b) Data of spindle motor
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page number
OPERATION Character ***** 1
GEAR/OUT SEL Character ***** 1
COMMAND PULSE(pulse) 2Word ±99999999 1
COMMAND SPEED(1/min) Word -32768 ~ 
+32767
(Note2) 1
CONTROL INPUT Character ***** 1
CONTROL OUTPUT Character ***** 1
ACT.SPINDLE SPEED (1/min) Word -32768 ~ 
+32767
2
ACT.MOTOR SPEED (1/min) Word -32768 ~ 
+32767
(Note2) 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
+32767
(Note2) 2
LOAD METER (%) Word 0 ~ +10000 2
TORQUE CMD(%) Word -100 ~ +100 Torque command. “100” 
shows the maximum torque.
2(Note7)
MOTOR CURRENT (A) Word -4096 ~ +4095 2(Note7)
HEAT SIMU.(MOTOR) (%) Byte 0 ~ +100 “100” shows the alarm level of 
OVC alarm.
2(Note7)
HEAT SIMU.(AMP) (%) Byte 0 ~ +100 “100” shows the alarm level of 
OVC alarm.
2(Note7)
POS. ERROR (pulse) 2Word ±99999999 2
SYN ERR (pulse) 2Word ±99999999 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DC LINK VOLT. (V) Word 0 ~ +1023 Instantaneous value(Note3) 3(Note7)
PS VOLTAGE RMS (Vrms) Word 0 ~ +1023 Average value during 1 cycle 
of power source(Note3)
3(Note7)
PS VOLT.UMBALANCE (%) Word 0 ~ +15.5 Average value during 1 cycle 
of power source(Note3)
3(Note7)
PS VOLTAGE THD (%) Word 0 ~ +31.5 Average value of THD(Total 
Harmonic Distortion) during 1 
cycle of power source(Note3)
3(Note7)
PS CURRENT (A) Word 0 ~ +1023 Average value of current 
amplitude during 1 cycle of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
amplitude during 1 cycle of 
power source(Note3)
3(Note7)
PS STATUS FLAG 1 Bit 0 / 1 (Note5) 3(Note7)
PS STATUS FLAG 2 Bit 0 / 1 (Note5) 3(Note7)
PS STATUS FLAG 3 Bit 0 / 1 (Note5) 3(Note7)
PS STATUS FLAG 4 Bit 0 / 1 (Note5) 3(Note7)
PS INPUT FREQ (Hz) Word 0 ~ +102.3 Average value during 1 cycle 
of power source(Note3)
3(Note7)
SP INS.INFO. Byte 0 ~ 3F Various status flags at using 
Leakage detection function
(Note3)
4(Note7)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Note3)
4(Note7)
SP INS.RESISTANCE (MΩ) Word 0 ~ +102.1 Value of insulation resistance 
at using Leakage detection 
function(Note3)
4(Note7)
PS INT.TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5(Note7)
PS HEAT SINK TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5(Note7)
SP INT.TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5(Note7)
SP HEAT SINK TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5(Note7)
AMP GROUP/SLAVE Byte 0 ~ +255 Group number and Slave 
number of power supply (PS)
5(Note7)
PS DGN.INFO. Word 0 ~ FFFF Status flags of power 
supply(PS)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 213 -
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page number
AMP COMM.ERR.INF. Word 0 ~ FFFF Error information flags for 
communication between 
amplifiers
5(Note7)
SP DGN.INFO. Word 0 ~ FFFF Diagnosis flags for spindle 
amplifier(SP)
5(Note7)
SP FSSB UPR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note6) 6(Note7)
SP FSSB LWR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note6) 6(Note7)
SP FSSB UPR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note6) 6(Note7)
SP FSSB LWR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note6) 6(Note7)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
INT.A/B AMPLITUDE (V) Byte 0 ~ +2.55 Amplitude of internal analog 
sensor
7(Note7)
INT.A/B MAX FLUCT (mV) Byte 0 ~ +1270 Maximum fluctuation ratio of 
internal analog sensor
7(Note7)
INT.A/B OFFSET A (mV) Byte -1280 ~ +1270 Offset of A-phase of internal 
analog sensor
7(Note7)
INT.A/B OFFSET B (mV) Byte -1280 ~ +1270 Offset of B-phase of internal 
analog sensor
7(Note7)
INT.A/B NOISE CNT Word -32768 ~ 
+32767
The number of noise when the 
feedback data of internal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
feedback data of internal 
analog sensor is disturbed
7(Note7)
EXT.A/B AMPLITUDE (V) Byte 0 ~ +2.55 Amplitude of external analog 
sensor
7(Note7)
EXT.A/B MAX FLUCT (mV) Byte 0 ~ +1270 Maximum fluctuation ratio of 
external analog sensor
7(Note7)
EXT.A/B OFFSET A (mV) Byte -1280 ~ +1270 Offset of A-phase of external 
analog sensor
7(Note7)
EXT.A/B OFFSET B mV) Byte -1280 ~ +1270 Offset of B-phase of external 
analog sensor
7(Note7)
EXT.A/B NOISE CNT Word -32768 ~ 
+32767


key: chroma:document
string_value:
+32767
The number of noise when the 
feedback data of external 
analog sensor is disturbed
7(Note7)
INT.SRAL INTP.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of data 
interpolation when the 
feedback data of internal serial 
sensor is disturbed by noise
8(Note7)
INT.SRAL COM.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of communication 
error when the feedback data 
of internal serial sensor is 
disturbed by noise
8(Note7)
INT.SRAL WRN. Word 0 ~ FFFF Warning information of internal 
serial sensor
8(Note7)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
serial sensor
8(Note7)
EXT.SRAL INTP.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of data 
interpolation when the 
feedback data of external 
serial sensor is disturbed by 
noise
8(Note7)
EXT.SRAL COM.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of communication 
error when the feedback data 
of external serial sensor is 
disturbed by noise
8(Note7)
EXT.SRAL WRN. Word 0 ~ FFFF Warning information of 
external serial sensor
8(Note7)
SP DATA 1 Word -32768 ~ 
+32767
(Note4) 8(Note7)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 214 -
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page number
SP DATA 2 Word -32768 ~ 
+32767
(Note4) 8(Note7)
SP DATA 3 Word -32768 ~ 
+32767
(Note4) 8(Note7)
SP DATA 4 Word -32768 ~ 
+32767
(Note4) 8(Note7)
NOTE
1 The data range shows the range in which a data can be monitored in this 
function. It doesn’t show the system efficiency or rated value.
2 To display COMMAND SPEED and ACTUAL MOTOR SPEED, it’s necessary to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
set following parameters.
- No.4020 : Maximum motor speed of main spindle
- No.4196 : Maximum motor speed of sub spindle
(in case of using Spindle switching control)
3 The displayed values as Voltage, Current, Frequency, Resistance, and 
Temperature are approximate value and they have some error. If you want to 
know the precise values, please measure them by exclusive equipments.
4 SP DATA1-4 are used for service operation by FANUC
5 PS STATUS FLAG1-4 are used for service operation by FANUC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 FSSB ERROR and FSSB JITTER show the status of FSSB communication. 
They are used for service operation by FANUC.
7 These items are not displayed in the system of G321 and G331.
Table 1.15.4 (c) Data of others
Data Data form Page 
number
The latest latch date Year (Two last digits) / Month (Two digits) / Day (Two digits)
8(servo),
9(spindle)
The latest latch time Hour (Two digits) / Minute (Two digits) / Second (Two digits)
Executed file name at latched Character


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 215 -
Operation
- Servo monitor data screen
Fig.1.15.4 (b) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (Servo monitor data) (10.4-inch display unit)
Servo monitor data can be selected by pressing soft key [NEW]/[CURRNT]/[BEFORE]/[AFTER].
Soft key [NEW] and [CURRNT] is displayed alternately.
Moreover, Soft key [BEFORE]/[AFTER] is displayed to press soft key [NEW], and if soft key 
[CURRNT] is pressed, it is not displayed.
TIME
When alarm is Present
occurred


key: chroma:document
string_value:
occurred
Before After
1-4 immediately before 
occurrence of the alarm
Soft key [NEW] : Servo monitor data when the alarm is occurred is displayed.
Soft key [CURRNT] : Present servo monitor data is displayed.
Soft key [BEFORE] : When the alarm is occurred and status display changes into [LATCHED] state, 
data before four samplings immediately before occurrence of the alarm is 
preserved in CNC. Preserved servo monitor data changes and is displayed by


key: chroma:document
string_value:
pressing this soft key as "SAMPLED IN ALM"→"BEFORE ALM 1"→
"BEFORE ALM 2"→"BEFORE ALM 3"→"BEFORE ALM 4".
Soft key [AFTER] : As well as the above operation, Preserved servo monitor data changes and is 
displayed by pressing this soft key as "BEFORE ALM 4"→"BEFORE ALM 
3"→"BEFORE ALM 2"→"BEFORE ALM 1"→"SAMPLED IN ALM".
Soft key [MON_SP] : Spindle monitor data screen is displayed.
NOTE
Monitor data of 1 - 4 samplings immediately before occurrence of the alarm is 
not displayed since 4 pages.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 216 -
- Spindle monitor data screen
Fig.1.15.4 (c) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (Spindle monitor data) (10.4-inch display unit)
Spindle monitor data can be selected by pressing soft key [NEW]/[CURRNT]/[BEFORE]/[AFTER].
Soft key [NEW] and [CURRNT] is displayed alternately.
Moreover, Soft key [BEFORE]/[AFTER] is displayed to press soft key [NEW], and if soft key 
[CURRNT] is pressed, it is not displayed.
TIME
When alarm is Present
occurred
Before After


key: chroma:document
string_value:
occurred
Before After
1-4 immediately before 
occurrence of the alarm
Soft key [NEW] : Spindle monitor data when the alarm is occurred is displayed.
Soft key [CURRNT] : Present Spindle monitor data is displayed.
Soft key [BEFORE] : When the alarm is occurred and status display changes into [LATCHED] state, 
data before four samplings immediately before occurrence of the alarm is 
preserved in CNC. Preserved Spindle monitor data changes and is displayed by


key: chroma:document
string_value:
pressing this soft key as "SAMPLED IN ALM" → "BEFORE ALM 1" →
"BEFORE ALM 2" → "BEFORE ALM 3" → "BEFORE ALM 4".
Soft key [AFTER] : As well as the above operation, Preserved Spindle monitor data changes and is 
displayed by pressing this soft key as "BEFORE ALM 4" → "BEFORE ALM 3"
→ "BEFORE ALM 2" → "BEFORE ALM 1" → "SAMPLED IN ALM".
Soft key [MON_SV] : Servo monitor data screen is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 217 -
NOTE
Spindle monitor data that can the above operation is only an item from page 2 to 
page 3.
The value is displayed in the item on page 1 and since 4 pages o f the spindle 
monitor data screen the value at present when status display is [SAMPLING], or 
the value at the alarm is occurred when status display is [LATCHED].
- Change of displayed page
Displayed page is switched by pressing page key / .
- Change of displayed axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Change of displayed axis
Displayed axis is switched by pressing cursor key / .
- Preservation of data when alarm is occurred
When status display is in the state of [SAMPLING], and servo alarm/spindle alarm is occurred newly, 
"Data at the latest alarm occurrence" and "Data of 1-4 immediately before occurrence of the alarm" of the 
alarm occurrence axis are preserved.
As a result, [SAMPLING] of status display on the right of the screen changes into [LATCHED].
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
As for both servos and spindles, when the alarm as two or more axes at the 
same time is occurred, only the data of the axis of the least index of an axis is 
preserved.
- Clear of preserved data
After releasing all servo/spindle alarm, clear "Data at the latest alarm occurrence" and "Data of 1-4 
immediately before occurrence of the alarm".
As a result, [LATCHED] of status display on the right of the screen changes into [SAMPLING].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Moreover, the waveform data (various data of each axis) displayed on the trouble diagnosis graphic 
screen is cleared at the same time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 218 -
Clear operation procedure of preserved data (for 10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 The soft key display changes as follows if soft key [(OPER)] is pressed on the trouble diagnosis
monitor screen, the trouble diagnosis graphic screen or the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.
(The below figure is a trouble diagnosis monitor screen.)
Fig.1.15.4 (d) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch display unit)
2 Press the soft key [CLEAR].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the soft key [CLEAR].
The soft key display changes as follows.
Press the soft key [CAN] when you cancel the clear operation.
Fig.1.15.4 (e) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 219 -
3 Press the soft key [EXEC].
[LATCHED] of status display on the right of the screen changes into [SAMPLING]
Fig.1.15.4 (f) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Clear operation procedure of preserved data (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 The horizontal soft key [CLEAR] deletion is displayed on the trouble diagnosis monitor screen, the 
trouble diagnosis graphic screen or the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the horizontal soft key [CLEAR].
Press the horizontal soft key [CAN] when you cancel the clear operation.
3 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].
[LATCHED] of status display on the right of the screen changes into [SAMPLING]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 220 -
1.15.5 Trouble Diagnosis Graphic Screen
Outline
The waveform data immediately before occurrence of the alarm necessary for the diagnosis when the 
servo alarm / spindle alarm is occurred is displayed.
Trouble diagnosis graphic screen
The servo data / spindle data for a few seconds immediately before occurrence of the alarm is displayed 
by waveform on the screen. The data of maximum 4 kinds can be displayed at the same time.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The displayed data is set on the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis graphic screen (for 10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press soft key [G-ADJ.].
Fig.1.15.5 (a) Trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- Contents of display
(1) Red vertical line shows the position (time) in which the alarm is occurred..


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(2) The date when the alarm was occurred is displayed.
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis graphic screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press the vertical soft key [G-ADJ.].
(1)
(2)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 221 -
Operation
- Change of position and magnification
When Soft key [G-ADJ.] is pressed, the following soft keys appear.
［<］［W.PRM ］［G-ADJ.］［TRB_LV］［ ］［(OPRT)］［ ］
［<］［H-DOBL］［H-HALF］［←TIME］［TIME→］［ ］［＋］
［<］［ CH-1 ］［ CH-2 ］［ CH-3 ］［ CH-4 ］［ ］［＋］
［<］［WAV.EX］［WAV.RE］［WAV.↑］［WAV.↓］［ ］［ ］
Soft key [H-DOBL] : The length of the time base is expanded.
Soft key [H-HALF] : The length of the time base is reduced.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Soft key [TIME←] : The time base is moved to the left side.
Soft key [TIME→] : The time base is moved to the right side.
Soft key [CH-1] : The operation to the waveform of channel 1 is selected.
Soft key [CH-2] : The operation to the waveform of channel 2 is selected.
Soft key [CH-3] : The operation to the waveform of channel 3 is selected.
Soft key [CH-4] : The operation to the waveform of channel 4 is selected.
Soft key [WAV.EX] : The length of the spindle is expanded to the selected waveform.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Soft key [WAV.RE] : The length of the spindle is reduced to the selected waveform.
Soft key [WAV.↑] : The selected waveform is moved for above.
Soft key [WAV.↓] : The selected waveform is moved below.
The time scale is a common scale for the channel 1,2,3 and 4.
The position and magnification of the height scale can be set for each channel.
Parameter setting for waveform display on the trouble diagnosis graphic 
screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen
The data kind and the data unit of the waveform data displayed on the trouble diagnosis graphic screen 
are displayed and set on the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis parameter screen (for 10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press soft key [W.PRM].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 222 -
Fig.1.15.5 (b) Trouble diagnosis parameter screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis parameter screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press the vertical soft key [W.PRM].
Explanation
- Contents of display
CHANNEL：


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CHANNEL：
Channel for waveform display. Maximum 4 channels can be used. Set data from the first channel 
sequentially.
AXIS :
Axis for waveform display. Manual setting is available. In some cases Axis data is set automatically
for diagnosis in trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
DATA KIND :
Data kind for waveform display. Manual setting is available. In some cases data kind is set 
automatically for diagnosis in trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
DATA UNIT :


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DATA UNIT :
Unit of display data. This data is set automatically according to data kind. Manual setting is invalid.
FORECAST LV :
This data decides boundary value to output trouble forecast signal. Manual setting is available.
Guidance of setting each item :
The guidance to the above setting each item is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 223 -
Operation
- Data Setting
1 Move cursor by Cursor key to the setting item.
2 Input number by MDI key and press input key to set data. 
The content of the following each items can be input by the above operation.
AXIS :
In case of servo axis, input control axis number.
 (Example) Set "1" for first servo axis.
In case of spindle axis, input "100 + spindle number".
 (Example) Set "101" for first spindle axis.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
Set the index of an axis in the path system to the control axis number and the 
control spindle number for the multi path system.
DATA KIND :
Input data number value according to the following table.
Table 1.15.5 (a) Data of Servo motor
Data number Data kind
1 Accumulated command pulse (pulse)
2 Accumulated feedback pulse (pulse)
3 Position error (pulse)
4 Reference counter (pulse)
5 Actual speed (1/min)
6 Command current (%)
7 Thermal simulation data (%)
8 Torque (%)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Torque (%)
9 Disturbance level (%)
11 R-phase current (%)
12 Effective current (%)
13 Pulse coder AMR data
14 Optional data 2
20 SV U CURRENT (A)
21 SV V CURRENT (A)
22 PS L1-L2 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
23 PS L2-L3 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
24 PS L3-L1 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
25 PS L1 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
26 PS L2 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
27 PS L3 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
28 PS DC LINK VOLT. (V) (Note3)
Table 1.15.5 (b) Data of Spindle motor
Data number Data
15 Actual speed (1/min)
16 Load meter (%)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
16 Load meter (%)
17 Position error (pulse)
18 Actual speed (1/min) (80msec)
19 Load meter (%) (80msec)
30 SP U CURRENT (A)
31 SP V CURRENT (A)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 224 -
Data number Data
32 PS L1-L2 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
33 PS L2-L3 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
34 PS L3-L1 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
35 PS L1 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
36 PS L2 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
37 PS L3 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
38 PS DC LINK VOLT. (V) (Note3)
NOTE
1 Each data kind is classified as follows as the combination to which the 
waveforms can be displayed at the same time.
- Data number :1 – 17
- Data number :18, 19
- Data number :20, 21, 30, 31


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Data number :20, 21, 30, 31
- Data number :22 - 28, 32 – 38
Therefore, if the values other than the same combination as the data kind of 
another channel are set when the data number is input to the data kind, Warning 
"DATA SETTING ERROR" is displayed.
2 The emergency must stop when the set point displays the data kind of 
waveforms of 20 or more number.
3 The displayed values as Voltage and Current are approximate value and they


key: chroma:document
string_value:
have some error. If you want to know the precise values, please measure them 
by exclusive equipments.
1.15.6 Trouble Forecast Level Setting Screen
Trouble forecast level of the servo motor is set in this screen.
The breakdown level at the thermal simulation and disturbance level can be set.
Explanation
Thermal simulation
The calorific value of the motor and the amplifier is simulated based on a real current of the servo motor.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The alarm of "SOFTTHERMAL (OVC)" is occurred so that the motor or the amplifier might cause over 
heat when this thermal simulation data reaches 100%.
Data value increases in the following cases.
1) Operating that frequency of acceleration and deceleration is high.
2) Operating to which state with very large cutting load continues.
3) The machine did not work according to the instruction though the motor output a full torque by the 
contact etc. of the machine and work.
Disturbance level


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Disturbance level
The disturbance level shows the torque that the motor receives from the machine excluding the torque to 
accelerate/decelerate the motor and the machine inertia in the output torque of the motor.
1) The machine came in contact with work.
2) The cutting load has increased.
An increase in these values is observed by this function, and warning can be occurred before the accident
to the machine and occurrence of the alarm.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 225 -
Display procedure of trouble forecast level setting screen (for 10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press soft key [TRB LV].
Fig.1.15.6 (a) Trouble forecast level setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- Contents of display
(1) Current value of thermal simulation/disturbance level is displayed with sign.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(2) Current value of thermal simulation or disturbance level is displayed by bar graphic.
Light Blue part : Current value of thermal simulation/disturbance level.
Red part : Trouble forecast level.
(3) Trouble forecast level.
The negative value is converted into the absolute value and a positive value is displayed.
Display procedure of trouble forecast level setting screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press the vertical soft key [TRB LV].
Operation
- Setting trouble forecast level
1 Select thermal simulation or disturbance level by page keys / .
2 Select axis by cursor keys / .
3 Input numerical value by MDI key and press input key or soft key [INPUT].
Trouble forecast level is input into parameter No.8860 and 8861.
(3)
(2)
(1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 226 -
- Change of trouble forecast level
When Soft key [TRB LV] is pressed, the following soft keys appear.
［<］［W.PRM ］［G-ADJ.］［TRB LV］［ ］［(OPRT)］［ ］
［<］［－10％］［＋10％］［ －1％］［ ＋1％］［INPUT ］［ ］
Soft key [ -10% ] : Subtract 10% from trouble forecast level.
Soft key [ +10% ] : Add 10% to trouble forecast level.
Soft key [ -1% ] : Subtract 1% from trouble forecast level.
Soft key [ +1% ] : Add 1% to trouble forecast level.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Soft key [INPUT] : Input trouble forecast level by MDI key.
- Trouble forecast signal
When thermal simulation or disturbance level of servo axis exceeds trouble forecast level, trouble forecast 
signal TDSML1 - 8 (Fn298)/ TDFTR1 - 8 (Fn299) is output.
Parameters TRSx (bit 0 of parameter no.8855) / TRFx (bit 1 of parameter no.8855) need to be set to 1 to 
perform the trouble forecast.
- Setting of trouble forecast level on the trouble diagnosis parameter screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The trouble forecast level can be set even on the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.
1. The trouble diagnosis parameter screen is displayed.
2. The cursor is moved to the item set with the cursor key.
3. The axis is set to the servo axis.
4. The data kind is set at thermal simulation (7) or disturbance level (9).
5. Because the editing box next to "FORECAST LV" can be edited, the trouble forecast level that 
wants to be set to the axis is input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 227 -
1.15.7 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8850 MDG
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 MDG Trouble diagnosis function is:
0: Available.
1: Not available.
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8855 TRFx TRSx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 TRSx Trouble forecast of thermal simulation of servo axis is:
0: Not available.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0: Not available.
1: Available. (Please set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8860.)
#1 TRFx Trouble forecast of disturbance level of servo axis is:
0: Not available.
1: Available. (Please set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8861.)
8860 Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation is set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8861 Trouble forecast level for disturbance level
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Trouble forecast level for disturbance level is set.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 228 -
1.15.8 Signal
Trouble forecast signals for thermal simulation TDSML1 - TDSML8 <Fn298>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] The thermal simulation data is notified to exceed the trouble forecast level.
[Output condition] When the thermal simulation data of servo is a value that is bigger than the trouble 
forecast level, this signal is "1".
Trouble forecast signals for disturbance level TDFTR1 - TDFTR8 <Fn299>
[Classification] Output signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] The disturbance level is notified to exceed the trouble forecast level.
[Output condition]When the disturbance level of servo is a value that is bigger than the trouble forecast level, 
this signal is "1".
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn298 TDSML8 TDSML7 TDSML6 TDSML5 TDSML4 TDSML3 TDSML2 TDSML1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn299 TDFTR8 TDFTR7 TDFTR6 TDFTR5 TDFTR4 TDFTR3 TDFTR2 TDFTR1
1.15.9 Restrictions
- The use of the I/O Link βi amplifier


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The alarm occurred by the motor with the I/O Link βi amplifier cannot be diagnosed.
- Using with waveform diagnosis display function together
When data of the machine signal or the servo/spindle are traced by waveform diagnosis display function, 
the waveform data displayed on the trouble diagnosis graphic screen is not sampled.
- This function on the NC Guide / NC Guide Pro
This function is a not available on the NC Guide / NC Guide Pro.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 229 -
1.16 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS
1.16.1 Outline
It is necessary to notify the operator by the alarm display and warning message in the machine tool when 
a peculiar problem to the machine such as the tool breakage and coolant shortage occurs.
The machine tool builder customizes by using the external alarm, the macro alarm, and the operator 
message function and a peculiar alarm and message to such a machine can be displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In this function, the diagnostic information to specify the factor in addition can be added to the alarm and 
the message that the machine tool builder customized.
When a peculiar alarm to the machine etc. are occurred, the added diagnostic information is displayed on 
the guidance screen of the trouble diagnosis function and can be used to specify the cause.
Fig.1.16.1 (a) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To add the diagnostic information on the screen, make the diagnostic message data to be displayed and 
convert it the memory card format file that can be read by CNC by using the PC tool "Guidance table for 
machine alarm diagnosis".
After the file is loaded into CNC, the additional diagnostic information can be displayed on the screen.
Machine alarm
occurrence
What caused the alarm ?
・Is ATC abnormal ?
・Tool breakage ?
・Coolant shortage ?
The cause can be specified 
on the trouble diagnosis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 230 -
1.16.2 Additional alarm and operator message
The alarm and the operator message on the machine side that can be added to the trouble diagnosis 
message are as follows.
1. External alarm
2. Macro alarm
3. External operator message
1.16.3 Diagnosis Number
In the alarm and the operator message on the machine side, the alarm number and message number that 
can be diagnosed in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen are as follows.
1. External alarm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. External alarm
Table 1.16.3 (a) Available diagnosis alarm number (External alarm)
Parameter EXA(No.6301#0)
=0 =1
Alarm number 1000～1999 0～4095
2. Macro alarm
Table 1.16.3 (b) Available diagnosis alarm number (Macro alarm)
Parameter MCA(No.6008#1)
=0 =1
Alarm number 3000～3200 0～4095
3. External operator message
Table 1.16.3 (c) Available diagnosis message number (External operator message)
Parameter EXM(No.6301#1)
=0 =1
Message number 2000～2999 0～4095
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 Available diagnosis message number in the external operator message is a 
number according to the setting of parameter No.6310.
2 The above available diagnosis number is a range of the number displayed on the 
CNC screen, and it is different from the number actually set by the each function.
Please refer to the following manuals for the number actually set by the each 
function.
- External alarm / External operator message
"INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS" in PMC


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64513EN)
- Macro alarm
"CUSTOM MACRO" in OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System /
Machining Center System) (B-64694EN)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 231 -
1.16.4 Environment for Making Trouble Diagnosis Message
The following operating environment and the PC tool "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" are 
necessary to make the trouble diagnosis message displayed on trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
Prepare the personal computer as follows, and install this tool according to the next chapter.
- Operating environment


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Operating environment
Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista Business
Memory Windows XP: More than 512M bytes
Windows Vista: More than 1G bytes
Free space in hard disk More than 128M bytes
Necessary equipment PC card adapter
Necessary application Microsoft Excel 2007
* Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista and Excel are the registered trademarks of Microsoft corporation in USA.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
"Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" is not included in the option of 
"machine alarm diagnosis function".
Purchase "CNC Application Development Kit" (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12)
additionally.
1.16.5 Guidance Table for Machine Alarm Diagnosis
This tool is used to make the trouble diagnosis message displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance 
screen.
Install this tool in the personal computer according to the following procedures, and make the trouble 
diagnosis message.
1.16.5.1 Install


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1.16.5.1 Install
The installation procedure of this tool is as follows:
1 Run setup.exe in the install disc (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12).
2 In the following setup dialog box, set an appropriate installation folder and press the <Next> button.
Fig.1.16.5.1 (a)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 232 -
NOTE
By pressing the <Browse> button, the installation folder can be changed.
3 By pressing the <Next> button in the dialog box for the confirmation of install, the installation will 
be started.
4 After the installation is finished normally, a message box to show the finish of the installation 
appears and "FANUC Guidance Table" is added in the Windows start menu.
1.16.5.2 Uninstall
The uninstall procedure of this tool is as follows:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Open the Windows control panel.
2 In the control panel, open the [Add or Remove Programs] and select "FANUC Guidance Table for 
Machine Alarm Diagnosis" from the currently installed programs.
NOTE
Open the [Programs and Features] in Windows Vista.
3 By pressing the <Remove (or Uninstall)> button, a message box for the confirmation of uninstall 
appears. By pressing the <Yes> button, this tool will be uninstalled.
1.16.5.3 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Making a Excel file in which trouble diagnosis messages are input is as follows:
Fig.1.16.5.3 (a)
1 Select [Program]→[FANUC Guidance Table]→[New File] in the Windows start menu, then the 
"New File" dialog box will be displayed.
Fig.1.16.5.3 (b)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 233 -
2 In the following dialog box, input a destination folder and file name of the Excel file to be made.
NOTE
1 The extension of the file name must be "xls" (Excel book format). Any other 
extension is ignored and it is changed to "xls".
2 When making a new file is failed, the message box "A trouble diagnosis 
message file cannot be made." is displayed with one of the following messages 
about the cause of that failure.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The specified file name is not correct.
- The specified file has already existed.
- (Destination folder) is not found.
- Files in (destination folder) cannot be written.
- The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file.
3 Click the [OK] button, a Excel file will be made as the specified name in the specified folder.
The trouble diagnosis messages can be input by opening the new Excel file.
1.16.5.4 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Three are 2 sheets in the Excel file to input the trouble diagnosis messages.
- [Overall] sheet ............The sheet for overall operations and settings
- [Guidance] sheet ............The sheet for inputting message strings
Fig.1.16.5.4 (a)
- Structure of [Overall] sheet
In the [Overall] sheet, you can make the trouble diagnosis messages by using the following operation 
buttons from (1) to (3).
And, you can switch the display language in sheets and change the settings for multi-languages.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 234 -
- Overview for each items
Item Name Description Reference
(1) Input Guidance Data Displays the [Guidance] sheet to input the trouble diagnosis 
messages.
Chapter
1.16.6.1
(2) Check Input Data Checks all input data on the [Guidance] sheet as to checking 
for the range of number, the invalid letter and so on.
Chapter
1.16.6.2
(3) Make Memory Card 
File
Makes a CNC readable memory card format file from input data 
in the [Guidance] sheet.
Chapter


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Chapter
1.16.6.3
(4) Display Language Switches the display language for sheets by selecting a 
language and pressing the [Apply] button. Either Japanese or 
English can be selected.
－
(5) Result of Check Displays the result of check for all input data. Chapter
1.16.6.2
(6) Multi-Languages Changes the settings to input messages for multi-languages. Chapter 1.16.7
- Structure of [Guidance] sheet
In the guidance sheet, you can input numbers and messages for each alarm or operator message.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig.1.16.5.4 (c)
- Overview for each items
Item Name Description Reference
(1) Guidance Table 1 The table to input numbers and titles for alarm or operator 
message.
Chapter 
1.16.6.1
(2) Guidance Table 2 The table to input questions and instructions to an operator for 
alarm or operator message.
Chapter 
1.16.6.1
(3) Jump to Page Switches the display between the guidance table 1 and 2. －
(4) Check Input Data Checks input data for each guidance table. Chapter 
1.16.6.2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1.16.6.2
(5) Set Line Number Adds or deletes lines by a number specified in the combo box 
at the bottom of the guidance table 1 or 2.
Note that all line number in the guidance table is from the 
minimum 30 to the maximum 2000.
－
(4) (3) (5) (4)
(1) (2)
(3)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 235 -
1.16.6 Making Trouble Diagnosis Messages
Make the trouble diagnosis messages by using the following operation buttons in order from (1) to (3) on 
the [Overall] sheet.
The brief of making procedure is as follows:
Fig.1.16.6 (a)
(1) Input Guidance Data
Displays the [Guidance] sheet to input trouble diagnosis messages.
(2) Check Input Data
Checks all input data on the [Guidance] sheet
(3) Make Memory Card File


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Make Memory Card File
Makes a memory card format file from input data in the [Guidance] sheet.
The details for each operation are as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 236 -
1.16.6.1 Input Guidance Data
By clicking the [Input Guidance Data] button on the [Overall] sheet, the [Guidance] sheet will be 
displayed.
Input data on the guidance table 1 and 2 according to the descriptions of the next section.
The data that is input on each guidance table is displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen as the 
following figure.
Fig.1.16.6.1 (a)
Table 1.16.6.1 (a) Display item of trouble diagnosis guidance screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Display Item Description
Classified code Classified code and number for the current alarm or operator message
Title Title for the current alarm or operator message
Probable cause Cause of the current alarm or operator message
Guidance message Confirmation to determine cause of an alarm, or an instruction about an operator 
message
NOTE
The character that can be displayed on the CNC screen can be used for each 
display item. As for details, refer the following manuals.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
" CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE" in OPERATOR’S 
MANUAL (Common to Lathe System / Machining Center System) (B-64694EN)
Input items on the guidance table 1
Input item on the guidance table 2
Classified code
Title
Proable cause
Guidance message


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 237 - 
- About input data in the guidance table 1 
Table 1.16.6.1 (b) Description of items in the guidance table 1 
Item Description Content of item Num. of letters 
(1) Kind Input a kind for an external alarm, a macro alarm or an operator 
message. 
Specify one of the following strings. 
EX : External alarm 
MC : Macro alarm 
OP : External operator message 
NOTE 
 If a kind other than above is input, checking input data is failed. 
2 English capital


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 English capital 
letters 
(2) Number Input a number for an external alarm, a macro alarm or an operator 
message. 
Within 4 numbers 
(3) Classified 
Code 
Input 2 types of code, "Code 1" and "Code 2". 
"Code 1 – Code 2" is displayed at the first line on the trouble diagnosis 
guidance screen. 
 Code 1 Input a classified code for an alarm or an operator 
message. 
Within 2 letters (1 
in multi-bytes 
letters) 
Code 2 Input a number for an alarm or an operator messages. Within 16 letters


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(8 in multi-bytes 
letters) 
NOTE 
1 It is not necessary to make each classified code to be the same 
as (1)kind and (2)number. 
2 A character string "NC" is reserved as the code 1 of CNC 
alarm. Do not use "NC" as the code 1. 
(4) Title Input a string displayed at the second line on the trouble diagnosis 
guidance screen. 
Within 32 letters 
(16 in multi-bytes 
letters) 
(5) Probable 
Cause 
Input a string displayed at the "Probable cause" part on the trouble 
diagnosis guidance screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
diagnosis guidance screen. 
Within 32 letters 
(16 in multi-bytes 
letters) per line 
(maximum 3 
lines) 
(6) Message ID Input an ID of a message displayed on the "Guidance Message" part 
of the trouble diagnosis guidance screen at first when an alarm occurs. 
Ex. The first guidance message for the external alarm message 
alarm No.1000 ：EX1000A 
NOTE 
 As for the message ID, see the description of the next 
description " About input data in the guidance table 2". 
Within 8 letters


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Within 8 letters 
(English capital 
and numerical 
letters) 
(7) Additional 
information 
(Reserved) 
Do not input in the item. 
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 238 - 
- About input data in the guidance table 2 
Table 1.16.6.1 (c) Description of items in the guidance table 2 
Item Description Content of item Num. of letters 
(1) Message ID It is a string to identify to one of the guidance messages in (2). 
Ex.1. The first message for the external alarm No.1000 : 
EX1000A 
Ex.2. The second message for the external alarm No.1000 : 
EX1000B 
NOTE 
 The character string that starts by "M"+"Number" is not used as


key: chroma:document
string_value:
message ID. Because this shows the destination of the jump of 
the machine side to guidance table 2 from the guidance table 
for the CNC alarm. Therefore, do not use the character string 
that starts by "M"+"Number". 
Within 8 letters 
(English capital 
and numerical 
letters) 
(2) Guidance 
Message 
It is a message displayed on the "Guidance Message" part of the 
trouble diagnosis guidance screen. Input a question, an instruction and 
so on to an operator. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
so on to an operator. 
NOTE 
 When the guidance message is shown on the trouble diagnosis 
screen, a new line code is inserted to the message per 32 
letters (16 in multi-bytes letters) automatically. 
If you want to insert a new line code at a free position, input 
"¥n" that is not included as the number of letters. 
 Moreover, the line number of the message is within 4 including 
the above automatic new line. 
Within 128 
letters (64 in 
multi-bytes 
letters) 
(3) Next Message 
ID


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Next Message 
ID 
Input a message ID that is jumped to when pressing the soft key [Yes] 
or [No] for each question of guidance message. 
Input "-1" when there is no message ID to be jumped. 
Within 8 letters 
(English capital 
and numerical 
letters) 
(4) Notes Free notes can be written. 
1.16.6.2 Checking input data 
By clinking the [Check Input Data] button on the [Overall] sheet, all input data on the guidance sheet will


key: chroma:document
string_value:
be checked as to the range of number, the number of letters, the invalid letter and the line number of 
strings. 
 
After the check is completed, the string of the [Result of Check] on the [Overall] sheet is changed from 
"Unchecked" to "OK". 
NOTE 
 After "OK" is displayed, it might return to "Unchecked" by editing on the 
[Guidance] sheet again. 
(1) (2) (3) (4)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 239 - 
If the check is failed, the string of the [Result of Check] is changed to "NG" and a name of sheet and 
guidance table where an error occurs is shown in a cell under the [Result of Check]. 
The guidance table where an error occurs is displayed by clicking the name of the guidance table. 
Fig.1.16.6.2 (a) 
In the guidance table, the color of an error cell is changed to green and an error message is attached to the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
error cell as a commnet of the cell like the above figure. The list of the error messages is as follows: 
- Input a number. 
- The value is out of range (n to m). 
- Input a string within n characters (m in multi-bytes characters). 
- The line number is over limit n. 
- The message referenced by the ID is not found. 
- The kind(s) cannot be specified. 
※m and n are numbers, s is a string 
NOTE 
1 The input data can be checked for an individual guidance table by clicking the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[CHECK] button displayed at the top of the guidance table. 
 In this case, the result of the check is displayed under the [CHECK] button like 
the following figure. 
 
 
2 In case that errors occurs on two or more guidance tables, the [Result of Check] 
on the [Overall] sheet shows the name of the guidance table where the first error 
occurs. As for the result of check for each guidance table, see the display under 
the [CHECK] button.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the [CHECK] button. 
Moreover, the color of the cell changes into light blue when the character string that shows the destination 
of the jump of the machine side to guidance table 2 from the guidance table for the CNC alarm is input to 
message ID. 
Example )


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 240 -
1.16.6.3 Making a memory card format file
By clicking the [Make Memory Card File] button on the [Overall] sheet, the following dialog box will be 
displayed.
Fig.1.16.6.3 (a)
Make a CNC readable memory card format file as follows:
1 Input a folder name where you want to make a file in the [Destination folder].
2 Input a file name that you want to make in the [File name].
" GUI_USR.MEM " is input by default.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When you input a file name without its extension, the extension "MEM" is added to the file name 
automatically.
3 Click the [OK] button.
After making the file is completed, the message box "Making the memory card format file is completed." 
will be displayed.
NOTE
1 The available file name is a short file name with alphabetic and numerical letters 
(8.3 MS-DOS format).
Other name format cannot be read by CNC.
2 If a file having the same name as the specified one has already existed in the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
destination folder, the file always will be overwritten. 
3 When making the memory card format file is failed, the message box "The 
memory card format file cannot be made." is displayed with one of the following
messages about the cause of that failure.
- The input data have not been checked on (sheet name) – guidance table (1 
or 2)
- There are error(s) of the input data on (sheet name) – guidance table (1 or 2) 
- The specified file name is not correct.
- (Destination folder) is not found.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Files in (destination folder) cannot be written.
- The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file.
By loading the file to CNC with the CNC BOOT function, the trouble diagnosis message can be 
displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen when the relevant external alarm, macro alarm or 
operator message happens.
NOTE
As for the CNC BOOT function, refer to "BOOT SYSTEM" in this manuals.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 241 -
1.16.6.4 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table
As a result of the diagnosis of the CNC alarm, the diagnosis of the machine side might be needed.
There is special message ID that jumps from the guidance table of the CNC alarm to the guidance table 
on the machine side for the diagnosis of such a case.
It is possible to jump to the diagnosis of MTB's guidance table after the diagnosis of the CNC alarm if the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
guidance table is made by using Message ID shown by "M"+"Number" in the following tables.
Tabel 1.16.6.4 (a) Reserved message ID
No. Message ID Title Probable cause
1 M205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF The rigid mode DI signal (G061.0) is not set to 1 when 
G84 (G74,G88) is executed.
2 M409 DETECT ABNORMAL TORQUE A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a 
load torque higher than a normal operation value.
3 M410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an


key: chroma:document
string_value:
axis from reaching a target position.
4 M411 EXCESS ERROR ( MOVING ) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an 
axis from moving.
5 M420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical 
synchronism with each other, resulting in a large torque 
difference.
6 M421 EXCESS ERROR (SEMI-FULL) With a closed-loop machine, a shift occurred between 
the motion of the motor and the motion of the separate 
detector by a cause such as a mechanical twist.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 M436 SOFT THERMAL (OVC) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a 
large load and the flow of an excessive current.
NOTE
Message ID shown by "M"+"Number" other than existing in the above table is not 
available.
1.16.7 Making Messages for Multi-languages
To change the language of messages displayed in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen complying with 
the display language of CNC, it is necessary to input messages for each language and make the memory 
card format file.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
card format file.
The messages for each display language are input on dedicated sheets for multi-languages.
NOTE
The messages in the [Guidance] sheet are assumed as English.
If you need messages other than English, make messages as follows:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 242 -
1.16.7.1 Making sheets for multi-languages
Making sheets for multi-languages is as follows:
Fig.1.16.7.1 (a)
1 Click the [Multi-Languages] button on the [Overall] sheet. The following dialog box will be 
displayed.
2 Turn on a check box for a language that you want to make in the [Make sheet] list. Two or more 
check boxes can be turned on.
After turning on the check box in the [Make sheet] list, the check box for the corresponding


key: chroma:document
string_value:
language can be operated in the [Output file] list.
3 In the [Output file] list, turn on a check box for a language that you want to output to your CNC 
readable memory card format file at the same time. Up to 5 check boxes other than English can be 
turned on. 6 or more check boxes cannot be turned on.
4 Click the [OK] button.
The sheets that are selected in the item 2 will be made like the following figure.
NOTE
1 The supported languages are 18 ones shown in the previous dialog box.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 The number of languages that can be output to the file of the memory card 
format at the same time is six languages (English + five national languages).
3 Once a sheet for multi-languages is made, the language of the [Guidance] sheet 
assumed as English. And, in the previous dialog box, the check box for English 
in the [Make sheet] and [Output file] list is turned on by default and they cannot 
be operated.
4 If you input other than English messages in the [Guidance] sheet before making


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the sheet for multi-languages, move the messages in the [Guidance] sheet to a 
sheet for an appropriate language by cut and paste operation of Excel.
5 To remove the sheet for multi-languages, turn off the check box for the language 
that you want to remove in the [Make sheet] list in the previous dialog box.
Sheets for multi-languages


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 243 -
1.16.7.2 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages
The way to input data on the sheet for multi-languages is the same as one on the [Guidance] sheet that has 
already explained in the section "Making trouble diagnosis messages". However, data can be input for the 
3 items only – Title, Probable cause and Guidance message.
As for data other than the 3 times, data in the [Guidance] sheet is copied to here and displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig.1.16.7.2 (a) Sheet for multi-languages : Guidance table 1
Fig.1.16.7.2 (b) Sheet for multi-languages : Guidance table 2
After inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages, check the input data and make the memory card 
format file according to the procedure described in "Making trouble diagnosis messages".
NOTE
The display language of the trouble diagnosis guidance screen is switched 
automatically according to the CNC display language.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
However, when there is no message for the CNC display language in the 
memory card file, the input messages in the [Guidance] sheet are displayed.
1.16.8 Notice
- Excel’s file of trouble diagnosis message
When you use "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis", change the setting of the macro function to 
"Enable" in the Trust Center of Excel 2007. If the setting is "Disable", the trouble diagnosis message 
cannot be made.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
cannot be made.
To enable the macro function by setting a path in the "Trusted Locations" of the Trust Center, set the 
folder where the file to input trouble diagnosis messages should be located and also the install folder of 
the "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis".
1.16.9 Translating Data Used with the Former Series
(Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B)
The Excel file and the memory card file used with the former series (Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i


key: chroma:document
string_value:
/18i /21i-B) cannot be used with the current target series (Series 0i-F) of this function.
Translate the Excel file used with the former series and make the memory card format file again 
according to the following description.
1 Select [Program]→[FANUC Guidance Table]→[Translate Former Series Data] in the Windows start 
menu.
Fig.1.16.9 (a)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 244 -
2 In the displayed dialog box, input a Excel file name used with the former series in the [Source file 
name] and input a translated file name in the [Destination file name].
Fig.1.16.9 (b)
3 Click the [OK] button, then the translated Excel file that is specified in the [Destination file name] 
will be made.
4 With the translated Excel file, check input data and make the memory card format file according to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the section "Making trouble diagnosis messages".
NOTE
1 Input a full path in the [Source file name] and [Destination file name]. The path 
name cannot be omitted. The extension of the file name must be "xls" (Excel 
book format). Any other extension is ignored and it is changed to "xls".
2 The "Kind" in the guidance table 1 is input automatically complying with the 
"Number" during the translation.
No. 1000 to 1999 → EX (External alarm)
No. 2000 to 2999 → OP (External operator message)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
No. 3000 to 3200 → MC (Macro alarm)
3 When translating data is failed, the message box "The data cannot be 
translated." is displayed with one of the following messages about the cause of 
that failure.
- (Source file name) is not found.
- (Destination folder name) is not found.
- Files in (destination folder) cannot be written.
- The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file
- (Destination file name) has already existed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 If you use separated Excel files for Japanese and English with the former series, 
translate both files and make a sheet to input Japanese messages in the English 
file. Then, move the data form the Japanese file to the sheet to input Japanese 
in the English file by cut and paste operation of Excel so as to combine two files 
to one.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 245 -
1.17 CONTENTS-OF-MEMORY DISPLAY SCREEN
The contents of the CNC memory can be displayed starting at a specified address.
Procedure for displaying the contents of memory display screen
1 Set bit 0 (MEM) of parameter No. 8950 to 1 to display the memory contents display screen.
2 Press function key .
3 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft key [MEMORY].
The following screen (Fig. 1.17 (a)) appears:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 1.17 (a) Memory contents display screen
4 Key in a desired address (hexadecimal) then press soft key [ADDRES SEARCH]. Starting at the 
specified address, 256-byte data is displayed.
(Example: When you input 100000 then press soft key [ADDRES SEARCH], data is displayed
starting at 100000H.)
5 Display data can be switched by using page keys and and cursor keys , ,
, and/or .
6 By pressing soft key [BYTE], [WORD], [LONG], or [DOUBLE], select a data type to be displayed.
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
A memory data display format can be selected from the following four options:
- Byte display (1 byte in hexadecimal)
- Word display (2 bytes in hexadecimal)
- Long display (4 bytes in hexadecimal)
- Double display (8 bytes in decimal: Double precision floating-point display)
One screen displays 256-byte memory data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-64695EN/01
- 246 -
NOTE
1 When an address is input, "H" for representing "hexadecimal" need not be 
specified at the end of the address. If H is added, a warning is displayed to 
indicate that the format is invalid.
2 When word display is selected as the display format, an input address is 
rounded to a multiple of 2 bytes. When long display or double display is selected, 
an input address is rounded to a multiple of 4 bytes.
WARNING


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 247 - 
2 CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE 
This chapter describes the hardware configuration of the control unit, various printed-circuit boards in the 
control unit, their locations, LED indicators, and their locations. 
2.1 EXAMPLE OF HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 
2.1.1 Example of the Hardware Configuration of the LCD-mounted 
Type Control Unit 
Control unit 
MDI unit 
Servo motor 
Optical fiber cable 
Servo amplifier
I/O Link i


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 248 - 
2.1.2 Example of the Hardware Configuration of the Stand-alone 
Type Control Unit 
PANEL i またはパーソナルコンピュータ
サーボモータ
光ファイバケーブル
サーボアンプ
機械操作盤・強電回路等
I/O ユニット
コントロールユニット
I/O Link i
PANEL iH Pro or personal computer 
Control unit 
Servo amplifier
Servo motor
MDI unit 
I/O Unit 
Machine operator’s panel/ Power magnetics circuit etc. 
Optical fiber cable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 249 - 
2.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW 
2.2.1 LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview 
Unit without optional slots 
or 
Unit having two optional slots
Basic system 
Options 
NOTE 
1 On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be mounted. 
2 Type 0 is not equipped with analog output and position coder. 
- CPU for controlling CNC 
- Power supply 
- Axis control function 
- MDI I/F 
- I/O Link i control function 
- Analog output


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Analog output 
- Position coder 
- PMC control function 
- High-speed skip (HDI) 
- RS-232C I/F 
- Memory card I/F 
- USB I/F 
- Ethernet function 
Fast Ethernet board 
Fast Ethernet function 
Data server function 
FL-net function 
EtherNet/IP master/slave function 
PROFINET master/slave function 
Modbus/TCP server function 
HSSB interface board 
High-speed serial bus interface 
Main board 
Various types of network boards 
PROFIBUS-DP master board 
PROFIBUS-DP slave board


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PROFIBUS-DP slave board 
DeviceNet master board 
DeviceNet slave board 
CC-Link remote device station board


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 250 - 
2.2.2 Stand-alone Type Control Unit Overview 
Basic system 
Options (Slot 1 to 2) 
- CPU for controlling CNC 
- Power supply 
- Axis control function 
- Display unit I/F 
- I/O Link i control function 
- Analog output 
- Position coder 
- PMC control function 
- High-speed skip (HDI) 
- RS-232C I/F 
- Memory card I/F 
- Ethernet function
Fast Ethernet board 
Fast Ethernet function 
Data server function 
FL-net function


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FL-net function 
EtherNet/IP master/slave function 
PROFINET master/slave function 
Modbus/TCP function
Main board 
Slot 1 
2-slot rack 
Various types of network boards 
PROFIBUS-DP master board 
PROFIBUS-DP slave board 
DeviceNet master board 
DeviceNet slave board 
CC-Link remote device station board
Main board 
Slot 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 251 - 
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 
In the case of LCD-mounted type Type 0 
Main board 
24V-IN(CP1)
MDI(CA55)
RS232C-1(JD36A)
HDI(JA40)
CK27
MDI unit
24 VDC power supply
JA3
CPD1
CPD1
JD1A
JD1B
JD1B
DC24V
DC24V Operator's 
panel 
Distributed 
I/O board 
I/O unit, etc
Distributed 
I/O board Manual pulse generator
Absolute scale battery
FSSB(COP10A)
Circuit breaker
AC200V
DC24V
MCC Circuit breaker
AC reactor
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV


key: chroma:document
string_value:
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV
αi SP
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Position coder 
COP10B
COP10A
CP11A
COP10B
COP10A
DC24V JF101
JF102
JF103
JF104
JA4A
Separate detector interface unit 1
Linear scale, axis 1
Linear scale, axis 2
Linear scale, axis 3
Linear scale, axis 4
COP10B
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
αi PS
Serial spindle motor
CNF1
To separate detector interface unit 2
（(In this figure, a 1-axisamplifier is used.)
ETHERNET(CD38S) Ethernet


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ETHERNET(CD38S) Ethernet
Di s pl a y u nit
I/O Link i
JD1A
RS-232C I/O device
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
(JD44A)
RS232C-2(JD36B)
High-speed skip input
Power 
magnetics 
cabinet 
RS-232C I/O device
USB(CD41P) USB
COP10B
COP10A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 252 - 
In the case of LCD-mounted type Type 1, 3, 5 
Main board 
24V-IN(CP1)
MDI(JA2)
RS232C-1(JD36A)
A-OUT&HDI(JA40)
CK27
MDI unit
24 VDC power supply
JA3
CPD1
CPD1
JD1A
JD1B
JD1B
DC24V
DC24V Operator's 
panel 
Distributed 
I/O board 
I/O unit, etc
Distributed 
I/O board Manual pulse generator
{
Touch panel
Absolute scale battery
FSSB(COP10A)
Circuit breaker
AC200V
DC24V
MCC Circuit breaker
AC reactor
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV


key: chroma:document
string_value:
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV
αi SP
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Position coder 
COP10B
COP10A
CP11A
COP10B
COP10A
DC24V JF101
JF102
JF103
JF104
JA4A
Separate detector interface unit 1
Linear scale, axis 1
Linear scale, axis 2
Linear scale, axis 3
Linear scale, axis 4
COP10B
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
αi PS
Serial spindle motor
CNF1
To separate detector interface unit 2
（(In this figure, a 1-axisamplifier is used.)
RS-232C I/O device


key: chroma:document
string_value:
RS-232C I/O device
ETHERNET(CD38A) Ethernet
Di s pl a y u nit
I/O Link i
JD1A
RS-232C I/O device
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
(JD51A)
RS232C-2(JD36B)
High-speed skip input
Analog output for tool drives
Position coder 
P0S(JA41)
Power 
magnetics 
cabinet 
COP10B
COP10A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 253 - 
Main board
24V-IN(CPD19A)
24V-OUT(CPD19B)
DISPLAY(COP21A)
HDI(JA40) High-peed skip input
24 VDC power supply
JA3
CPD1
CPD1
JD1A
JD1B
JD1B
VDC24
VDC24
Manual pulse generator
Battery for absolute scale
FSSB(COP10A-1)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
24VDC
MCC Circuit breaker
AC reactor
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV
αi SV
αi SP
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Position coder
COP10B
COP10A
CP11A
COP10B
COP10A
DC24V JF101
JF102


key: chroma:document
string_value:
COP10A
DC24V JF101
JF102
JF103
JF104
JA4A
Separate detector interface unit 1
Linear scale, axis 1
Linear scale, axis 2
Linear scale, axis 3
Linear scale, axis 4
COP10B
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
αi PS
Serial spindle motor
CNF1
To separate detector interface unit 2
(In this figure, a 1-axis amplifier is used.)
Control unit 
I/O Link i
JD1A
PANEL iH Pro or personal computer
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
ETHERNET(CD38A) Ethernet
To I/O device


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To I/O device
RS232C-2(JD36A) RS-232C I/O device
RS232C-1(JD56A) RS-232C I/O device
JD1A
JD1B β amplifier 
with I/O Link Servo motor
(JD51A)
Stand-alone type control unit 
Power 
magnetics 
cabinet 
Operator's 
panel 
Distributed 
I/O board, 
I/O unit, etc.
Distributed 
I/O board 
COP10B
COP10A
POS(JA41)
Position coder 
Analog output for tool drives


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 254 - 
Optional slot 
When optional boards are provided 
ETHERNET(CD38R)
Fast Ethernet board 
Ethernet or FL-net ,and so on 
HSSB(COP21N)
HSSB interface board
PANEL iH Pro 
or Personal Computer 
Use a compact flash card purchased from FANUC 
PROFI(CN1)
PROFIBUS-DP 
master board 
Other control unit 
or PROFIBUS device 
PROFI(CN2)
PROFIBUS-DP 
slave board 
Other control unit 
or PROFIBUS device 
DVNET(TBL)
DeviceNet 
master board


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DeviceNet 
master board 
Other control unit 
or DeviceNet device 
DVNET(TBL)
DeviceNet 
slave board 
Other control unit 
or DeviceNet device 
CCLNK(CT1)
CC-Link remote 
device station board 
CC-Link device 
Compact flash card


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 255 - 
2.4 HARDWARE OF LCD-MOUNTED TYPE CONTROL UNIT 
- Main board specification 
Name Specification Remark 
Main board For Type 0 A20B-8102-0140 
A20B-8102-0141 
For Type 1, 3, 5 A20B-8102-0116 
A20B-8102-0117 
A20B-8102-0118


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 256 - 
 - Connector mounting location 
 Type 0 
 Fan motor 
（COP10A is a connector installed on the main board）
Rear view of the control unit
CD38S 
CP1 
COP10A 
JD36A JD36B JD44A 
CA55 
Battery 
Main board 
JGM 
CA132 
CA142 
CA88A 
CN1 CD46L 
Fuse 
JA40 
CD41P 
CK20A 
CK21A 
CA149 
COP10A 
CA149 
CK20A 
CK21A CA55 
JD36A JD36B JA40 JD44A CD38S 
CP1 
CD41P Fuse


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 257 - 
Connector number Application 
COP10A For FSSB interface 
CA55 For MDI 
JD36A For I/O device interface (RS-232C, CH1) 
JD36B For I/O device interface (RS-232C, CH2) 
JA40 For high-speed skip 
JD44A For I/O Link i
CP1 For power supply 
JGM For back panel 
CA142 For video signal interface 
CA88A For memory card interface 
CD46L For USB port (Front side of the control unit) 
CD41P For USB port (Rear side of the control unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CK20A For horizontal soft key 
CK21A For vertical soft key 
CA132 For fan adapter board 
CD38S For Ethernet (Embedded Ethernet) 
CN1 For touch panel interface 
CA149 For buzzer interface


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 258 - 
 Type 1, 3, 5 
 Fan motor 
（COP10A is a connector installed on the main board）
Rear view of the control unit
CD38A 
CP1 
COP10A 
JD36A JD36B JD51A 
Battery 
Main board 
JGM 
CA132 
CA135 
CA88A 
CD46A 
Fuse 
JA40 
CK20A 
CK21A 
COP10A 
CK20A 
CK21A 
JA2 JD36B JA40 JD51A JA41 
CP1 
Fuse 
JA2 JA41 
CD38A JD36A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 259 - 
Connector number Application 
COP10A For FSSB interface 
JA2 For MDI 
JD36A For I/O device interface (RS-232C, CH1) 
JD36B For I/O device interface (RS-232C, CH2) 
JA40 For high-speed skip and analog output 
JD51A For I/O Link i
JA41 For position coder 
CP1 For power supply 
JGM For back panel 
CA135 For video signal interface 
CA88A For memory card interface 
CD46A For USB port (Front side of the control unit) 
CK20A For horizontal soft key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CK20A For horizontal soft key 
CK21A For vertical soft key 
CA132 For fan adapter board 
CD38A For Ethernet (Embedded Ethernet) 
 - Locations of printed circuit boards 
 Type 0 
(1) FROM/SRAM module 
(2) Back panel 
(with power supply) 
(3) GUI card (4) Compact Flash card 
No. name Specification Remark 
(1) FROM/SRAM module A17B-3900-0103 The FROM stores various control software 
programs, user software programs, and so forth. 
The SRAM is a battery-backed memory module.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When FROM/SRAM module is exchanged, our 
service staff installs the system software. 
(2) Back panel 
(with power supply) 
A20B-8201-0700 For no slot 
A20B-8201-0720 For 2 slots 
(3) GUI card A20B-3300-0840 
(4) Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173/002GBFT Capacity: 2GB 
A87L-0001-0173/004GBFT Capacity: 4GB 
A87L-0001-0173/008GBFT Capacity: 8GB 
A87L-0001-0173/016GBFT Capacity: 16GB 
A87L-0001-0173/032GBFT Capacity: 32GB


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 260 - 
 Type 1, 3, 5 
(1) FROM/SRAM module 
(2) Back panel 
(with power supply) 
No. name Specification Remark 
(1) FROM/SRAM module A17B-3900-0103 The FROM stores various control software 
programs, user software programs, and so forth. 
The SRAM is a battery-backed memory module. 
When FROM/SRAM module is exchanged, our 
service staff installs the system software. 
(2) Back panel 
(with power supply) 
A20B-8201-0700 For no slot


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 261 - 
 - Block diagram 
 Type 0 
Memory card 
DC24V 
USB 
MDI 
HDI 
I/O Link i
Calendar 
function 
Main board
FSSB 
LCD unit 
RS-232C 
FROM/SRAM 
module 
：Detachable card or module
CPU control 
CPU DRAM BOOT 
software 
Ethernet 
(Embedded 
Ethernet) 
Peripheral 
control 1 
Compact 
Flash card 
Back panel 
Power 
supply 
Optional 
board 
I/O Link i
control 
Peripheral 
control 2
Battery 
Servo 
control 
Touch panel 
Buzzer


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 262 - 
 Type 1, 3, 5 
DC24V Battery 
Peripheral control 
Ethernet 
(embedded 
Ethernet)
MDI 
RS-232C 
Memory card 
USB 
High-speed skip
Position coder 
Analog output I/O Link i
Calendar 
function 
Main board
FSSB 
LCD 
unit 
I/O Link i 
control 
FROM/SRAM 
module
: Detachable card or module 
CPU control 
DRAM BOOT 
software 
Ethernet 
control 
Optional 
board 
Back panel 
Power 
supply
CPU 
Servo control


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 263 - 
 - LED display 
 Type 0 
(1) Alarm LED (Red) 
Rear view of the control unit 
(4) Ethernet (Embedded Ethernet) 
status LED (5) 7-segment LED 
(2) GUI status LED
(Green) 
(3) GUI alarm 
LED (Red) 
ALM1 
ALM2 
ALM3 
CCPU 
ALM 
D3 
D6 
D7 
D5 
COM LINK
(Yellow) (Green)
(1) Alarm LED (Red) 
ALM CCPU 
1 2 3 ALM Meaning 
□ ■ □ ◇ Low battery voltage. The battery may be is running out.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
■ ■ □ ◇ Software detected an error and stopped the system. 
□ □ ■ ◇ Hardware detected a failure in the system. 
■ □ ■ ◇ An alarm was issued with the servo circuit on the main board. 
□ ■ ■ ◇ An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the FROM/SRAM module. 
The FROM/SRAM module may be faulty, the battery voltage may have dropped, or the 
main board may be faulty. 
■ ■ ■ ◇ Abnormal power supply operation. The cause may be noise or the back panel (with 
power supply) failure.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
power supply) failure. 
◇ ◇ ◇ ■ The Main board may be faulty. 
◇ ◇ ◇ ◇ Lights if there is an abnormal condition in the power supply on the main board. 
: On : Off : Don’t care


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 264 - 
(2) GUI status LED (Green) 
LED Meaning D6 D7 D5 
□ □ □ State where the power is not tuned on, or state where the system was started up 
successfully and is running normally. 
■ ■ ■
State immediately after the power is turned on. 
If the state remains unchanged: 
If “CCPUALM” is on: 
It is likely that the CPU card may be defective. 
If “CCPUALM” is off: 
It is likely that the main board or GUI card may be defective.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
■ ■ □ The NCBoot32 screen is active. 
□ ■ □ IPL processing is under way. 
: On : Off 
(3) GUI alarm LED (Red) 
LED Meaning 
D3 Common RAM error. The main board may be faulty. 
(4) Ethernet (Embedded Ethernet) status LED 
LED Meaning 
LINK (Green) Turned on when a connection is made with the hub correctly. 
COM (Yellow) Turned on when data is transferred. 
(5) 7-segment LED 
 See Appendix “LED Display”. 
 - LED display (GUI Card) 
V4 
V3 
V2 
V1 Green 
Green 
Green 
Green


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Green 
Green 
Green 
LED Status Meaning when LED stops V4 V3 V2 V1 
    Power-on The cause may be GUI card or the 
main board failure. 
    FROM check The cause may be the GUI card 
    DRAM check failure. 
    Display beginning The cause may be the GUI card or the 
main board failure. 
    DRAM check The cause may be the GUI card 
failure. 
    GUI system loading beginning The cause may be the GUI card, the 
compact flash card or the main board 
failure.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 265 - 
LED Status Meaning when LED stops V4 V3 V2 V1 
    GUI system operation beginning The cause may be the GUI card 
failure. 
    NAND flash driver start The cause may be the GUI card 
failure. 
    HSSB driver start The cause may be the CPU card, the 
servo card or the main board failure. 
    PCMCIA driver start The cause may be the main board 
failure. 
    ETHERNET, SERIAL driver start The cause may be the GUI card or the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
    USB driver start main board failure. 
    DISPLAY driver start 
    Backlight-on 
    MDI, TOUCH PANEL driver start The cause may be the GUI card or the 
main board failure. 
    FROM error The cause may be the GUI card or the 
    DRAM error main board failure. 
    NAND flash error The cause may be the GUI card 
failure. 
    Filesystem error The cause may be the GUI card 
failure. 
    CNC error The cause may be the CPU card, the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 266 - 
 Type 1, 3, 5 
(1) Alarm LED (Red) 
Rear view of the control unit 
(2) Ethernet (Embedded Ethernet) 
status LED 
(3) 7-segment LED 
D6 
ALM1 
ALM2 
ALM3 
LINK
COM
(Green) 
(Yellow) 
(1) Alarm LED (Red) 
CORE ALM CCPU 
ALM 1 2 3 ALM Meaning 
     Low battery voltage. The battery may be is running out. 
     Software detected an error and stopped the system. 
     Hardware detected a failure in the system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
     An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main board. 
     An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the FROM/SRAM module. 
The FROM/SRAM module may be faulty, the battery voltage may have dropped, 
or the main board may be faulty. 
     Abnormal power supply operation. The cause may be noise or the back panel 
(with power supply) failure. 
     The CPU card may be faulty.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
     Lights if there is an abnormal condition in the power supply on the main board. 
: On : Off : Don’t care


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 267 - 
(2) Ethernet (Embedded Ethernet) status LED 
LED Meaning 
LINK (Green) Turned on when a connection is made with the hub correctly. 
COM (Yellow) Turned on when data is transferred. 
(3) 7-segment LED 
 See Appendix “LED Display”. 
 - FAN adaptor board specification 
 Type 0 
Name Specification Remark 
FAN adapter board For 10.4” LCD unit A20B-8201-0157 
For 15” LCD unit A20B-8201-0158 
 Type 1, 3, 5 
Name Specification Remark


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Name Specification Remark 
FAN adapter board For 10.4” LCD unit A20B-8201-0152 
For 10.4” LCD/MDI unit 
 - Configuration of the FAN adaptor 
 Common to Type 0, 1, 3, 5 
LCD unit 
FAN adapter board
CA158 CA132 
Main board 
CA132 
 - Location of the FAN adaptor 
 Type 0 
FAN adapter board 
Rear view of the control unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 268 - 
 Type 1, 3, 5 
FAN adapter board 
Rear view of the control unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 269 - 
2.5 HARDWARE OF STAND-ALONE TYPE CONTROL UNIT 
 Main board specification 
Name Specification Remark 
Main board A16B-3200-0772 
 - Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc. 
JD56A: For I/O device interface (RS-232C)
JD36A: For I/O device interface (RS-232C)
JD51A: For I/O Link i 
JA40: For high-speed skip
LINK,COM: LED for Ethernet
CPD19A (right): For 24VDC power supply input
STATUS: 7-segment LED
MTSW: Rotary SW
COP21A: For HSSB interface


key: chroma:document
string_value:
COP21A: For HSSB interface
COP10A-1: For FSSB interface
GND: SG connection terminal
Battery
CNM1B: For memory 
card interface
PSW: Push SW
FUSE ALM: Fuse burn-out detection LED
BAT1: For battery
CPD19B (left): For 24VDC power supply output
CD38A: Connector for Ethernet (Embedded Ethernet)
ALARM: Alarm LED
COREALM: Alarm LED
STATUS 7-segment LED 
 This LED indicates the state of the control unit. This LED is used also for setting and maintenance


key: chroma:document
string_value:
using the rotary switch MTSW and the push switch PSW. 
MTSW rotary switch 
 This rotary switch is used for setting and maintenance operations, in combination with the STATUS 
7-segment LED and the PSW push switch. 
PSW push switch: 
 This push switch is used for setting and maintenance operations, in combination with the STATUS 
7-segment LED and the MTSW rotary switch.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 270 - 
 - Mounting positions of cards, power supply unit, and FROM/SRAM module 
(1) Servo card
(2) CPU card
(3) FROM/SRAM module
(4) Power supply unit
(5) Back panel
No. Name Specification Remark 
(1) Servo card A20B-3300-0818 
(2) CPU card A17B-3301-0357 
A17B-3301-0359 
(3) FROM/SRAM module A17B-3900-0103 The FROM stores various control software 
programs, user software programs, and so forth. 
The SRAM is a battery-backed memory module.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When FROM/SRAM module is exchanged, our 
service staff installs the system software. 
(4) Power supply unit A20B-8101-0011 
(5) Back panel A20B-2003-0580


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 271 - 
 - Block diagram 
DC24V 
Peripheral control 
Ethernet 
(Embedded 
Ethernet) 
MDI 
RS-232C 
Memory card 
High-speed skip
I/O Link i
Calendar 
function 
Main board 
FSSB 
HSSB 
Servo card I/O Link i, 
control 
FROM/SRAM 
module 
Power supply 
unit 
: Detachable card or module 
CPU card 
CPU DRAM BOOT 
software
I/O Link 
control 
Ethernet 
control 
Battery 
Back panel 
Optional board


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 272 - 
 - LED display 
(2) Status LED for Ethernet
 (Embedded Ethernet))
LINK (Upper, Green)
COM (Lower, Yellow)
1
2
3
4
FUSE ALM : Fuse burn-out detection LED
(3) STATUS: 7-segment LED
(1) ALARM: Alarm LED
(Red)
(Red)
(1) COREALM: Alarm LED (Red)
(1) Alarm LED (Red) 
 ALM CORE 
 1 2 3 4 ALM Meaning 
□ ■ □ ◇ ◇ Low battery voltage. The battery may be is running out. 
■ ■ □ ◇ ◇ Software detected an error and stopped the system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
□ □ ■ ◇ ◇ Hardware detected a failure in the system. 
■ □ ■ ◇ ◇ An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main board. 
□ ■ ■ ◇ ◇ An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the FROM/SRAM module. 
The FROM/SRAM module may be faulty, the battery voltage may have dropped, 
or the main board may be faulty. 
■ ■ ■ ◇ ◇ Abnormal power supply operation. The cause may be noise or the power supply 
unit failure. 
◇ ◇ ◇ ■ ◇ The CPU card may be faulty.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
◇ ◇ ◇ ◇ ■ Lights if there is an abnormal condition in the power supply on the main board. 
: On : Off : Don’t care 
(2) Status LED for Ethernet (Embedded Ethernet) 
LED Meaning 
LINK (Green) Turned on when a connection is made with the hub correctly. 
COM (Yellow) Turned on when data is transferred.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 273 - 
(3) 7-segment LED 
Dot 
LED Meaning 
Dot Turned on when the display unit is not connected to connector COP21A. 
If this LED is turned on when the display unit is connected, it is probable that the 
optical fiber cable is broken, the display unit is not powered on, or the display unit 
is faulty. 
See Appendix “LED Display” for others. 
Display Unit for Stand-alone Type Control Unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
It uses as a display unit the FANUC PANEL iH Pro or a commercially available personal computer. 
If connect the FANUC PANEL iH Pro, refer to “FANUC PANEL i / iH Pro CONNECTION AND 
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64683EN) or PANEL iH Pro CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE 
MANUAL (B-64703EN). 
2.6 HARDWARE OF OPTIONAL BOARDS 
2.6.1 Fast Ethernet Board 
 - Specification 
Name Specification Remark 
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0770 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
 The Ethernet board may be used for the data server and FL-net functions as well 
as the Ethernet functions depending on parameter setting.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 274 - 
 - Connector mounting location 
CD38R
Compact 
flash card 
Connector number Application 
CD38R For Ethernet 
 - LED display 
The board incorporates four LEDs. 
The locations and meanings of the LEDs are indicated below. 
CD38R 
HER (red) 
LCOM (yellow) 
STATUS (green) 
COL (red) 
NOTE 
 The face plate is indicated with dotted line.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 275 - 
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows: 
 : Off : On : Blinking 
LED display transition for STATUS (power on state)
LED display Status Meaning 
 Power-off 
 Immediately after power-on Initial state entered immediately after power-on. 
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the 
following: 
→ The CNC communication software may not be running


key: chroma:document
string_value:
normally. Check whether the communication software is 
installed properly. 
→ The hardware may be faulty. Replace this board. 
 Start completion The board has started normally. 
LED display transition for STATUS (during normal operation)
LED display Status Meaning 
 Normal status The board is operating normally. 
LED display for LCOM
LED display Status Meaning 
 Not connected to hub The board is not connected to the hub properly. 
The LED stays off also when the power to the hub is off.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Check whether the board is connected to the hub properly. 
 Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub. 
 Transmission/reception in 
progress 
Data is being transmitted or received. 
LED display for COL 
LED display Status Meaning 
 Normal status The board is operating normally. 


Collision occurs. 
(Data collision occurs.) 
The LED is on or blinks at short intervals when the Ethernet 
communication traffic (communication amount) is high or 
ambient noise is high.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ambient noise is high. 
LED display for HER
LED display Status Meaning 
 Normal status The board is operating normally. 
 Error detected in the hardware The cause may be a failure in this board or a malfunction due 
 Error detected in the software to noise. 
2.6.2 HSSB interface board 
 - Specification 
Name Specification Remark 
HSSB interface board A20B-8101-0111


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 276 - 
 - Connector and LED mounting location and LED display 
LEDR
BRDYA (green) 
(red) 
Connector number Application 
COP21N For HSSB interface 
 - LED display 
LED Meaning 
LEDR Turned on when a common RAM parity error occurs in this board. 
BRDYA Lights to indicate that a link has been established. 
2.6.3 PROFIBUS-DP Board 
 - Specification 
Name Specification Remark 
PROFIBUS-DP master board A20B-8101-0050 
PROFIBUS-DP slave board A20B-8101-0100


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Connector mounting location 
 - PROFIBUS-DP master board 
CN1
Connector number Application 
CN1 For PROFIBUS-DP master interface


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 277 - 
 - PROFIBUS-DP slave board 
CN2
Connector number Application 
CN2 For PROFIBUS-DP slave interface 
 - LED display and their meanings 
 - PROFIBUS-DP master interface 
LED2 LED1 
CN1 
NOTE 
 The face plate is indicated with dotted line. 
 - LED display 
Name Color Description 
LED1 Green 
Indicates that the CPU on this board has started running. 
On: RESET has been released, allowing the CPU to start running.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on. 
LED2 Green 
Indicates whether communication is being normally carried out. 
On: Communication is being normally carried out. 
Off: Communication is not being carried out. 
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 278 - 
 - PROFIBUS-DP slave board 
LED2 LED1 
CN2 
LEDB LED3 
NOTE 
 The face plate is indicated with dotted line. 
 - LED display 
Name Color Description 
LED1 Green 
Indicates that the CPU on this board has started running. 
On: RESET has been released, allowing the CPU to start running. 
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on. 
LED2 Green 
Indicates that communication has started. 
On: Communication has started.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on or if: 
- No parameter data and configuration data have been received. 
- Invalid parameter data and configuration data have been received. 
LED3 Green 
Indicates whether communication is being normally carried out. 
On: Communication is being normally carried out. 
Off: Communication is not being carried out. 
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on. 
LEDB Red 
Indicates that a RAM parity alarm condition has occurred on this board.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
On: A RAM parity alarm condition has occurred. 
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on. Once it has been turned on, it 
stays on until the power is turned off.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 279 - 
2.6.4 DeviceNet Board 
Specification 
Name Specification Remark 
DeviceNet master board A20B-8101-0220 
DeviceNet slave board A20B-8101-0330 
Connector and LED mounting location 
 - DeviceNet master board 
TBL 
Face plate 
NS MS (LED) 
From left to
right 
LEDWD 
LED3 
LED2 
LED1 
LED0 
Daughter board 
Connector number Application 
TBL For DeviceNet interface 
 - DeviceNet slave board 
TBL 
Face plate 
LED3 
LED2 
LED1 
LED0
MS NS


key: chroma:document
string_value:
LED2 
LED1 
LED0
MS NS 
LEDWD 
LED 
LED Green Green 
Green 
Green 
Red 
Green 
Red 
Green 
Red 
Connector number Application 
TBL For DeviceNet interface


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 280 - 
LED display and their meanings 
 - DeviceNet master board 
This board provides four green LEDs and one red LED for status indication. In addition, the internal 
daughter board has two LEDs that emit red and green light. 
Name Color Meaning 
LED0 to 3 Green Indicates the activation state of the DeviceNet application software. 
LEDWD Red Indicates an error on the daughter board.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MS Red / green Indicates the module status, which is the status of the local node. 
NS Red / green Indicates the network status, which is the status of the entire network including the 
local node. 
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows: 
: Off : On : Blinking : Don’t care 
LED display transition for LED0, LED1, LED2, and LED3 (during power-on) 
LED 
3 2 1 0 Status after power-on Action when stopped after power-on 
 Power-off


key: chroma:document
string_value:
 Power-off 
 After power-on, the DeviceNet application 
software does not start. 
The DeviceNet application software is not running 
normally. Check whether the software is installed 
properly. 
 Initializing the firmware on the daughter 
board. 
Replace the DeviceNet master board. 
 Checking memory on the daughter board. 
 Recognizing the firmware on the daughter 
board. 
 Reading DeviceNet parameters. Confirm that DeviceNet master function (software option)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
has been purchased. 
 Verifying that DeviceNet parameter 
“NETWORK” is set to “ONLINE.” 
Set DeviceNet parameter “NETWORK” to “ONLINE.” 
 Setting the bus parameter in DeviceNet 
parameters. 
Replace the DeviceNet master board. 
 Setting the slave parameter in DeviceNet 
parameters. 
Set the slave parameter in DeviceNet parameters 
correctly. If there is no problem with the setting, replace 
the DeviceNet master board.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the DeviceNet master board. 
 Checking duplicate MAC IDs. Check duplication with the MAC ID of a slave device. 
Check if cables are connected correctly. 
Check if power for communication is correctly supplied. 
Check if slave devices are turned on. 
 The DeviceNet application software has 
been initialized and I/O communication 
starts. 
LED display for LED0, LED1, LED2, and LED3 (when abnormality occurs) 
LED 
3 2 1 0 Status Meaning 

↑ ↓

(Repetition)


key: chroma:document
string_value:

↑ ↓

(Repetition)
Daughter board failure The daughter board failed. 
Replace the DeviceNet master board.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 281 - 
LED display for LEDWD 
LED display Status Meaning 
 Daughter board failure The daughter board failed. 
Replace the DeviceNet master board. 
LED display of MS and NS (during normal operation) 
LED display Status Meaning 
MS 
NS 
Immediately after power-on The MPU on the daughter board is being reset. 
MS  green 
NS 
Initializing The firmware on the daughter board is making a initialization. 
MS  green 
NS 
Checking duplication of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NS 
Checking duplication of 
MAC IDs 
The firmware on the daughter board is checking duplicated MAC IDs. 
MS  green 
NS  green 
I/O communication 
stopped 
The firmware on the daughter board is stopping I/O communication. 
MS  green 
NS  green 
I/O communication in 
advance 
The firmware on the daughter board is successfully performing I/O 
communication. 
LED display of MS and NS (during occurrence of an error) 
LED display Status Error and action 
MS  red 
NS 


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MS  red 
NS 
Daughter board failure A MAC ID or communication rate setting error occurred or the 
daughter board failed. When the setting is correct, replace the 
DeviceNet master board. 
MS  red 
NS 
Daughter board failure The daughter board failed. 
Replace the DeviceNet master board. 
MS 
NS  red 
Duplicate MAC IDs MAC IDs are duplicate. 
Verify the following: 
→ MAC IDs are not duplicate by check the MAC IDs of all nodes.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Busoff detection Communication stopped because a communication error occurred 
frequently. 
Verify the following: 
→ The communication rates of all nodes are set to the same value. 
→ The cable length is appropriate. 
→ The cable is not loose or broken. 
→ A terminal is placed on only both ends of the main line. 
→ There is not much noise. 
MS 
NS 
Network power failure Power for communication is not supplied. Verify the following: 
→ Power for communication is properly supplied.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Transmission error Transmission is not completed successfully. 
Verify the following: 
→ All slaves are turned on. 
→ There is no other master on the network. 
→ The communication rates of all nodes are set to the same value. 
→ The cable length is appropriate. 
→ The cable is not loose or broken. 
→ A terminal is placed on only both ends of the main line. 
→ There is not much noise. 
MS 
NS  red 
Slave not present No slaves are present. 
Verify the following: 
→ The slave is turned on.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
→ The slave is turned on. 
→ The communication rates of all nodes are set to the same value. 
→ The cable length is appropriate. 
→ The cable is not loose or broken. 
→ A terminal is placed on only both ends of the main line. 
→ There is not much noise.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 282 - 
LED display Status Error and action 
Slave I/O size mismatch The slave I/O size setting does not match the setting of the actual 
slave. 
Verify the following: 
→ The slave I/O size setting matches the setting of the actual slave. 
I/O communication error I/O communication timed out. 
Verify the following: 
→ The communication rates of all nodes are set to the same value. 
→ The cable length is appropriate. 
→ The cable is not loose or broken.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
→ A terminal is placed on only both ends of the main line. 
→ There is not much noise. 
DeviceNet slave board 
This board provides four green LEDs (LED0 to LED3) and one red LED (LEDWD) for status indication. 
In addition, there are two LED sets (MS and NS) that consist of one red LED and one green LED. 
Name Color Meaning 
LED0 to 3 Green Indicates the activation state of the DeviceNet application software. 
LEDWD Red Indicates an error on the DeviceNet slave board.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MS Green Indicates the module status, which is the status of the local node. 
Red 
NS Green Indicates the network status, which is the status of the entire network including the 
Red local node. 
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows: 
: Off : On : Blinking : Don’t care ？: Undefined 
LED display transition for LED0, LED1, LED2, and LED3 
LED 
3 2 1 0 
Status and cause when stopped after 
power-on Action when stopped after power-on 
 Power-off


key: chroma:document
string_value:
 Power-off 
 After power-on, the DeviceNet application 
software does not start. Or, the DeviceNet 
slave function (software option) is 
disabled. 
The DeviceNet application software is not running 
normally. Check whether the software is installed 
properly. 
Or, confirm that the DeviceNet slave function (software 
option) has been purchased. 
 Initializing the firmware. Replace the DeviceNet slave board. 
 Firmware has been initialized.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
 A line baud rate check is in progress. Check the status of communication with the DeviceNet 
master. 
A network power failure may also occur. Check 
whether the power for communication is supplied 
properly. 
If the system does not recover from the error, replace 
the DeviceNet slave board. 
 Checking duplication of MAC IDs 
 Waiting for I/O communication to be 
established. 
 I/O communication is normal. 
 I/O communication has timed out. 
 I/O communication is idle.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
LED display for LEDWD 
LED display Status Meaning 
 Board failure The DeviceNet slave board failed. 
Replace the DeviceNet slave board.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 283 - 
LED display of MS and NS (during normal operation) 
In the “during normal operation” status, when communication is normally established, a transition to the 
“I/O communication normal” status is made. 
LED display Status Meaning 
MS  green 
MS  red 
NS  green 
NS  red 
Immediately after power-on The onboard firmware is being initialized when the onboard 
MPU is in the reset status or reset release status. 
MS  green 
MS  red 
NS  green


key: chroma:document
string_value:
MS  red 
NS  green 
NS  red 
Communication under 
preparation 
The onboard firmware performs processing in the order below. 
(1) Waits for the DeviceNet application software to be 
initialized. 
(2) Checks the baud rate. 
(3) Checks MAC ID duplication. 
MS  green 
MS  red 
NS  green 
NS  red 
Waiting for I/O communication to 
be established. 
Each status corresponds to DeviceNet MPU status transition. 
MS  green 
MS  red 
NS  green 
NS  red 
I/O communication is normal.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
I/O communication is normal. 
MS  green 
MS  red 
NS  green 
NS  red 
I/O communication has timed 
out. 
NOTE 
 When a transition to the "I/O communication normal" status is not made, confirm 
that the power for communication is correctly supplied because a network power 
failure may have occurred. 
LED display of MS and NS (during occurrence of an unrecoverable failure) 
In the "during occurrence of an unrecoverable failure" status, once an error occurred, recovery is not


key: chroma:document
string_value:
performed unless this slave station is powered off and back on again. 
LED display LED 
3 2 1 0 
Status Error and action 
MS  green 
MS  red 
NS  green 
NS  red 

↑ ↓

(Repetition) 
Duplicate MAC IDs Check the following and then turn the slave 
power off and back on again. 
→ MAC IDs are not duplicate by check the MAC 
IDs of all nodes. 

↑ ↓

(Repetition)
Busoff detection Check the following and then turn the slave 
power off and back on again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
power off and back on again. 
→ The communication rates of all nodes are set 
to the same value. 
→ The cable length is appropriate. 
→ The cable is not loose or broken. 
→ A terminal is placed on only both ends of the 
main line. 
→ There is not much noise. 
MS  green 
MS  red 
NS  green 
NS  red 

↑ ↓
 ? ? ? 
(Repetition)
Board failure The DeviceNet slave board failed. 
Replace the DeviceNet slave board.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 284 - 
LED display LED 
3 2 1 0 
Status Error and action 
MS  green 
MS  red 
NS  green 
NS  red 

↑ ↓

(Repetition)
An unrecoverable failure 
occurred on the CNC 
side. 
Contact FANUC. 
2.6.5 CC-Link Board
Specification 
Name Specification Remark 
CC-Link remote device station board A20B-8101-0551 
Connector and LED mounting location 
 CC-Link remote device station board 
LED ERROR RD 
SD 
RUN
Outside line 
connector


key: chroma:document
string_value:
RUN
Outside line 
connector 
Face plate 
Red 
Green 
Green 
Green
LED display and their meanings 
 - CCC-Link remote device station board 
This board provides three green LEDs and one red LED for status indication. 
Name Color On Off 
RUN Green Online Offline 
SD Green Sending data. Not sending data. 
RD Green Channel carrier detected. Channel carrier error. 
ERROR Red CRC error detected. Communicating normally.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the usual, normal communication state, the on/off states of the LEDs are as follows:
Name On/off state 
RUN On 
SD Blinking 
RD On 
ERROR Off


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 285 - 
NOTE 
 If the number of units on the network is small, SD blinks at high speed, and it 
may appear on not insteading of blinking to the human eye. 
LED indicators in the event of an error 
In any of the following LED states, check the settings as listed in the table below. 
: Off : On : Blinking : Don’t care 
LED Meaning of the state Check item RUN SD RD ERR 
    • A CRC error occurred. 
Cable connection 
Terminating resistors


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Terminating resistors 
Measures against noise 
Baud rate 
   
• Data destined to the local station 
cannot be received from the master 
station. 
Settings of the master station 
    • The master station is not link-started. Settings of the master station 
    • Data cannot be received. 
Cable connection 
Measures against noise 
Settings of the master station 
    • The cable is disconnected. 
• The master station is not turned on. 
Cable connection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Cable connection 
Settings of the master station 
Check item What to check 
Cable connection 
• The cable is not connected. 
• The cable and the connector are connected together correctly. 
• The cable is not bend forcibly. 
• The inter-slave station distance is correct. 
Terminating resistors • Terminating resistors are connected to both ends of the cable. 
• The terminating resistors match the cable type. 
Measures against noise • Each unit is grounded.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Baud rate • The same baud rate is set for the master and slave stations. 
Settings of the master station 
• The master station is turned on. 
• The master station is operating normally. 
• The settings of the master station are made correctly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 286 - 
2.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE 
CABINET 
2.7.1 Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet 
The control unit and the peripheral units have been designed on the assumption that they are housed in 
closed cabinets. In this manual "cabinet" refers to the following: 
• Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the control unit or peripheral units;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for housing the display unit, MDI unit, 
or operator's panel. 
• Equivalent to the above. 
The following table lists the environmental conditions required in installing these cabinets. 
Ambient 
temperature of 
the cabinet 
Operating 0°C to 45°C 
Nonoperating (including storage 
and transportation) -20°C to 60°C 
Temperature change 0.3°C/minute or less 
Humidity Normal 75%RH or less, no condensation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Short period (less than 1 month) 95%RH or less, no condensation 
Vibration 
Operating 4.9m/s2 (0.5G) or less 
Nonoperating (including storage 
and transportation) 9.8m/s2
(1.0G) or less 
Meters above 
sea level 
Operating Up to 1000 m (see Note 1 in the Subsec. 2.7.2.)
Nonoperating (including storage 
and transportation) Up to 12000 m 
Environment 
Normal machine shop environment 
(The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
location where the density of dust, coolant, organic solvent, 
and/or corrosive gas is relatively high.) 
2.7.2 Installation Conditions of the Control Unit 
Condition LCD-mounted type control 
unit 
Stand-alone type control 
unit 
Ambient 
temperature 
Operating 0°C to 58°C 0°C to 55°C 
Nonoperating (including storage 
and transportation) -20°C to 60°C 
Temperature change 0.3°C/minute or less 
Humidity Normal 75%RH or less, no condensation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Short period (less than 1 month) 95%RH or less, no condensation 
Vibration 
Operating 
4.9m/s2 (0.5G) or less 
FANUC’s evaluation test was conducted under the following 
conditions complying with IEC 60068-2-6. 
 10 to 58Hz: 0.075mm (amplitude) 
 58 to 500Hz: 9.8m/s2
(1.0G) 
 Direction of vibration: Each of the X, Y, and Z directions 
 Number of sweep cycles: 10 
Nonoperating (including storage 
and transportation) 9.8m/s2
(1.0G) or less 
Meters above 
sea level


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Meters above 
sea level 
Operating Up to 1000m (Note 1)
Nonoperating (including storage 
and transportation) Up to 12000m 
Environment 
Coolant, lubricant, or cutting chips shall not be sprinkled 
directly over the CNC or servo unit. No corrosive gas shall be 
allowed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 287 - 
NOTE 
1 If the control unit is installed 1000 m or higher above sea level, the allowable 
upper ambient temperature of the control unit in the cabinet is changed as 
follows. Assume that the allowable upper ambient temperature of the control unit 
in the cabinet installed 1000 m or higher above sea level decreases by 1.0°C for 
every 100 m rise in altitude. 
Example) 
When a control unit whose required operating ambient temperature range is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0°C to 55°C is installed 1750 m above sea level: 
 55°C-(1750m-1000m)/100m × 1.0°C = 47.5°C 
 Therefore, the allowable ambient temperature range is from 0°C to 47.5°C. 
2 When using a unit having additional installation conditions, be sure to meet also 
these conditions. 
2.8 CAUTIONS RELATED TO GROUNDING AND NOISE 
The cabinet and pendant box generally have measures against electrical shocks and noise, such as


key: chroma:document
string_value:
connecting grounding wires and separating cables on routing, in them. If you removed grounding wires 
from the cabinet or pendant box, for example, in replacing a control or peripheral unit in the cabinet or 
pendant box or if you temporarily changed the way other cables are laid or bound, basically restore their 
original state of connection after maintenance work. Otherwise, it is likely that an electrical shock or 
noise may result and the unit may malfunction.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This section describes the concept of cable separation, a noise suppresser as a measure against noise, 
cable clamping and shield processing, and a lightning surge absorber. 
2.8.1 Separating Cables 
The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the following table. The cables in 
each group must have been subjected to treatment stated in the Action column. 
Table 2.8.1 Cable grouping 
Group Signal line Action


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Group Signal line Action 
A Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A separately (Note 1) 
from groups B and C, or cover group A with an 
electromagnetic shield (Note 2). 
See Subsection “Noise Suppressor” and connect 
spark killers or diodes with the solenoid and 
relay. 
Secondary AC power line 
AC/DC power lines (containing the power lines 
for the servo and spindle motors) 
AC/DC solenoid 
AC/DC relay 
B DC solenoid (24 VDC) Connect diodes with the DC solenoid and relay.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Bind the cables in group B separately from group 
A, or cover group B with an electromagnetic 
shield. 
Separate group B as far from group C as 
possible. 
It is desirable to apply shield processing 
described in Subsection 2.8.3. 
DC relay (24 VDC) 
DI/DO cable between the I/O unit and power 
magnetics cabinet 
DI/DO cable between the I/O unit and machine 
24 VDC input power cables connected to the 
control unit and its peripherals


key: chroma:document
string_value:
C I/O Link i cable Bind the cables in group C separately from group 
A, or cover group C with an electromagnetic 
shield. 
Separate group C as far from group B as 
possible. 
Be sure to perform shield processing as 
Cable for the position coder 
Cable for the manual pulse generator 
Cable for the MDI (Note 3)
RS–232C interface cable 
Cable for the battery


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 288 - 
Group Signal line Action 
Cable for the Ethernet described in Subsection 2.8.3. 
Other cables for which shield processing is 
specified 
NOTE 
1 Binding the cables in one group separately from another means that the groups 
are placed 10 cm or more apart from one another. 
2 Covering a group with an electromagnetic shield means that shielding is 
provided between groups with grounded steel plates.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 The shield is not required when the cable for the MDI is no more than 50 cm in 
length. 
 CAUTION 
 Select a cable with a proper length. If the cable is too long, the noise immunity 
may be reduced or noise may be caused on other cables. In addition, when the 
excess length is coiled, the inductance is increased and a high voltage is 
induced during turning on or off of signals. This may cause a failure or a 
malfunction due to noise. 
Cable of group A Cable of group B, C 
Duct


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Duct 
Cabinet Pendant box 
To motor 
and the like
Section of duct 
Shielding plate
Group A Group B, C 
Spindle 
amplifier 
Servo 
amplifier I/O 
Unit 
24VDC 
power 
supply 
Control 
unit 
Unit 
receiving 
AC 
voltage 
Shielding 
plate 
Fig. 2.8.1 Cable layout example 
2.8.2 Noise Suppressor 
A noise suppressor must be installed as a measure against noise that may occur in actuators such as 
solenoids and relays used in the power magnetics cabinet.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Because an actuator, which converts electrical energy to mechanical action, is an inductive load, it 
resonates with the parasitic capacitance in a circuit containing it, when it works on and off, thus 
generating intermittent arcs accompanied by abrupt voltage rises and falls at its contacts, hence 
electromagnetic waves interfering with electronics circuits. As a remediation measure, treat the inductive 
load as described below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
load as described below. 
1) While referencing the processing for cable groups A and B described in Subsection, “Separating 
Cables”, apply a CR snubber circuit and a diode, respectively, to an inductive load in an AC circuit 
and that in a DC circuit. 
2) When selecting a CR snubber or diode, observe the following cautions.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 289 - 
Cautions for selecting and using a CR snubber 
• Use a CR snubber in an AC circuit. 
A varistor, voltage clamping element, can limit the peak of an oscillating voltage waveform but 
cannot relax an abrupt voltage transition . For this reason, we recommend using a CR snubber rather 
than the varistor. 
• Determine the rating of the resistor and capacitor in the CR snubber according to the steady-state


key: chroma:document
string_value:
current I (A) and DC resistance RL (Ω) of the inductive load as follows: 
1) CR snubber resistance: R ≅ RL(Ω) 
2) CR snubber capacitance: 
20
2
I C
10
2
I ≤ ≤ (μF) 
• Place the CR snubber close to the inductive load to minimize its wiring. 
CR snubber 
Inductive load (such as relay) 
General-purpose induction motor M 
3 
 
Fig. 2.8.2 (a) Example of applying a CR snubber 
Cautions for selecting and using a diode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• A diode (freewheeling diode) can be used as a noise suppressor for a DC driver circuit. 
• Determine the ratings of the diode according to the drive voltage and current for the inductive load 
(such as a solenoid coil, relay, or motor) as follows: 
1) Voltage rating: Approximately twice the voltage applied to the inductive load 
2) Current rating: Approximately twice the steady-state current flowing through the inductive load


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Place the diode close to the inductive load in order to minimize its wiring. 
Inductive load (such as a relay) 
+ 
Diode 
Fig. 2.8.2 (b) Example of applying a diode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 290 - 
2.8.3 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing 
Each cable leading into this control unit, servo amplifiers, or spindle amplifiers that requires shielding so 
as to suppress external noise has been clamped (basically signal cables require shield clamps). So when 
the cable replaced by a new one, confirm that the shield processing complies with following 
requirements.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
requirements. 
Partially peel the sheath off each of such cables and expose the shield, and press the exposed portion 
against a ground bar with a clamp. Care should be taken so that the ground bar and shield have a surface 
contact in a larger area. 
The ground bar for the cable clamp must be installed as shown in Fig. 2.8.3 (a). 
When the multipoint grounding scheme is used, care should be taken so that the ground bar for the shield


key: chroma:document
string_value:
clamp and cabinet are connected at low impedance by, for example, preventing the cabinet side contact 
surface from being coated. 
When using an in-line connector or the like to split a cable, it is necessary to connect the shield of one 
portion of the cable and that of the other portion and to keep the total impedance of the two cable portions 
from becoming high. Even if the connector is placed at the inlet of the cabinet, it is also necessary to use


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the shield for the intra-cabinet portion of the cable all the way to the other end of the cable. 40 mm to 80 mm 
Ground bar for shield clamp 
Cable 
Metal fittings 
for clamp 
Fig. 2.8.3 (a) Cable clamp (1) 
NOTE 
 Bundle and clamp the shields of cables that lead into the control unit or amplifier 
at a point, respectively, close to the unit or amplifier.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 291 - 
Control unit 
Metal fittings for clamp 
Shield
Cabinet 
Ground bar for shield clamp 
Fig. 2.8.3 (b) Cable clamp (2) 
Prepare a ground bar for cable clamping shown below. 
Mount screw hole 
Hole for securing metal 
fitting clamp 
Ground terminal 
(grounded) 
Fig. 2.8.3 (c) Ground bar for shield clamp (outline drawing) 
The ground bar for cable clamping must be made of a steel plate at least 2 mm thick and plated with 
nickel. 
12
20


key: chroma:document
string_value:
nickel. 
12
20
8 Ground bar for shield clamp
(Unit: mm)
Fig. 2.8.3 (d) Ground bar for shield clamp (hole arrangement and dimension drawing)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE B-64695EN/01
- 292 - 
17
28
6 
Max. 55
(Unit: mm) 
Reference)
Fig. 2.8.3 (e) Clamping metal fixture (outline drawing) 
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp 
 A02B-0303-K001 (8 pieces) 
2.8.4 Lightning Surge Absorber 
A lightning surge absorber installed between input power lines and between input power lines and the 
ground might be effective to protect units from lightning voltage surges. However, installing a surge


key: chroma:document
string_value:
absorber does not always ensure protection from lightning surges. How to install the lightning surge 
absorber is explained below. 
Installation procedure
The surge-absorbing elements used for measures against surges due to lightening must be installed in the 
input power unit as shown in the figure below. The figure below shows an example in which an insulating 
transformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an insulating transformer is installed,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 2. CONTROL UNIT HARDWARE
- 293 - 
AC 
input 
Surge-absorbing element 1 
(between lines) 
To other electric parts on the machine 
R 
S 
T 
PE 
To control power input for control unit 
24 VDC power and control power 
supply input of Power Supply for 
servo amplifier
Surge-absorbing element 2 
(between line and ground) 
Circuit 
breaker
(5A,MCCB)
Circuit 
breaker 
(MCCB)
Circuit 
breaker 
(MCCB)
Magnetic 
contactor 
AC 
reactor 
Insulating 
transformer 
a 
b


key: chroma:document
string_value:
transformer 
a 
b
Circuit 
breaker 
(MCCB)
To main circuit 
power input of 
Power Supply for 
servo amplifier 
Fig. 2.8.4 Example of installing lightning surge absorbers on 200 VAC lines 
 CAUTION 
1 For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy line must be as 
short as possible. 
Wire size : Cross-sectional area at least 2 mm2
 large 
Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for the connection of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
surge-absorbing element 1 and that (b) of surge-absorbing element 
2 must be 2 m or less. 
2 If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages (1000 VAC and 
1500 VAC) to the power line, remove surge-absorbing element 2. Otherwise, the 
overvoltages would activate the element. 
3 The circuit breaker (5A) is a short circuit protection of lines if the surge-absorbing 
elements result in short circuit breakdown due to the absorption of an excessive 
amount of energy. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
amount of energy. 
NOTE 
 The circuit breaker (5A) can be used also for other electric parts on the machine 
because no current flows through surge-absorbing elements 1 and 2 in the 
normal state. The “other electric parts on the machine” can be the control power 
supply of Power Supply for servo unit and the power supply for the fan motor for 
a spindle motor.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 294 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3 REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.1 CAUTIONS FOR REPLACEMENT 
 WARNING 
1 Only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance 
training may perform this replacement work. When opening the cabinet and 
replacing the board, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits (marked 
with and fitted with an insulating cover). If you touch any uncovered


key: chroma:document
string_value:
high-voltage circuit, you will get an electric shock. 
2 Before exchanging, be sure to shut off externally supplied power. Otherwise, 
electrical shocks, breakdown, and blowout may occur. 
If a control unit is turned off but other units are not, it is likely that power may be 
supplied to servo units, resulting in the units being damaged and workers getting 
an electrical shock when the units are exchanged. 
3 In order to prevent damage that may be caused by static electricity, wear a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
grounding wrist strap or take a similar protective measure before starting to 
touch a printed-circuit board or unit or attach a cable. 
Static electricity from human bodies can damage electrical circuits. 
4 Voltage lingers in servo and spindle amplifiers for a while even after power has 
been turned off, resulting in workers possibly getting an electrical shock when 
the workers touch them. Before starting to exchange these amplifiers, wait for 20 
minutes after power has been turned off.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 When replacing a unit, ensure that the new unit has the same parameters and 
settings as the old one. (For details, refer to the manual for the machine.) 
Otherwise, unpredictable machine movement could damage the workpiece or 
the machine itself or cause injury. 
6 If you notice an apparent hardware fault, such as abnormal noise, abnormal 
odor, smoke, ignition, or abnormal heat, in the hardware while power is being 
supplied to it, shut it off at once. These faults can cause fire, breakdown,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
blowout, and malfunction. 
7 The radiating fins of control units, servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and other 
devices can remain very hot for a while after power has been turned off, making 
you get burned if you touch them. Before starting to work on them, wait and 
make sure they are cool. 
8 When exchanging heavy stuff, you should do so together with two or more 
people. 
 If the replacement is attempted by only one person, the old or new unit could slip


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and fall, possibly causing injury. 
9 Be careful not to damage cables. Otherwise, electrical shocks can occur. 
10 When working, wear suitable clothes with safety taken into account. Otherwise, 
injury and electrical shocks can occur. 
11 Do not work with your hands wet. Otherwise, electrical shocks and damage to 
electrical circuits can occur.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 295 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
NOTE 
1 When FROM/SRAM module is exchanged, our service staff installs the system 
software. 
2 The LCD (liquid-crystal display) has been fabricated using an extreme precision 
technology. However, some of their pixels may fail to light or stay constantly 
lighting because of their characteristics. Please be forewarned that these 
phenomena are not faults.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
phenomena are not faults. 
 The backlight used for the LCD has the life. The brightness decreases in 
long-term use. The long-life backlight which is applicable to FA environment is 
used. However, brightness decreasing is accelerated, or turning on becomes 
difficult under severe environmental conditions (especially operating 
temperature). 
 By using the screen saver function, It will be able to reduce a substantial


key: chroma:document
string_value:
decrease in brightness. (However, do not turn on / off screen display frequently. 
It is effective when performing off screen for at least 30 minutes.) 
3.1.1 Optional Information File 
This control unit supports the “FANUC Remote Option System”. Optional parameters are held as an 
optional information file (named “OPRM INF”) in FROM 
Cautions for optional information file restoration 
1) When making a backup copy of SRAM data and user files, make a backup copy also of an optional


key: chroma:document
string_value:
information file (named “OPRM INF”) in FROM. The optional information file is needed when the 
optional information must be restored, for example, because of it having been damaged. 
2) Once the optional information file is restored, alarm PS5523 “OPTION AUTHENTICATION WAIT 
STATE” is issued at power-on, indicating that the optional parameters must be authenticated by the 
FANUC service department within the period of validity (within 30 days since the occurrence of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
alarm). Alarm PS5523 can be canceled by pushing a reset key within the period of validity. Contact 
the FANUC service department for information about the authentication procedure. 
3.1.2 Attaching and Detaching Units 
LCD-mounted type control units, MDI units, and main panel machine operator's panels, can be 
categorized into two types in terms of the way they are mounted. One of the types is fixed using M4 nuts


key: chroma:document
string_value:
through the rear surface of the unit, and the other type is fixed using M3 screws through the front surface 
of the unit. The front surface-mount type units use screw caps for covering the screw holes in its corners. 
When attaching the M3-fixed type unit mentioned above to, or detaching it from, a cabinet, follow the 
procedure below while paying attention to the screw caps.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 296 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
Slot 
Detaching 
1. Pull out the screw cap from the screw hole in each corner by inserting a precision screwdriver (flat 
blade) into the slot in the screw cap head. 
2. Remove the screw which appeared each screw cap was detached to detach the unit. 
Attaching 
1. Fasten the unit by inserting a screw into the screw hole in each corner. Tighten the screws with an 
appropriate torque.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
appropriate torque. 
2. Cover each screw hole with a screw cap while making sure that all the screw caps are oriented in 
such a way that their slots face in the respective directions shown in the figure. Push in each screw 
cap until they become flush with the surface of the unit. 
NOTE 
 The ordering information for the screw caps is as follows: 
 A02B-0323-K190: A set of 100 screw caps 
 A02B-0323-K191: A set of 5 screw caps 
3.1.3 Tightening Torque for Fastening Units and Ground Terminals


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The following table lists the tightening torque for screws and nuts used to fasten the units (except those 
having molded mounting parts) explained herein and ground terminals in the units. 
Screw and nut diameter Tightening torque 
M3 0.8 to 1.0 N⋅m 
M4 1.6 to 2.0 N⋅m 
The following table lists the tightening torque for screws and nuts used to fasten those units having 
molded mounting parts, such as stand-alone type control unit, or separate detector interface units.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 297 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
 CAUTION 
 Be sure to observe the rules listed above when tightening screws. If screws are 
tightened too weakly or too strongly, it is likely that the unit may drop, break, or 
malfunction. 
For units having a touch panel in particular, be sure to observe the above rules. 
Failing to observe them can cause the touch panel to malfunction. 
NOTE 
 For units having different installation conditions specified herein, observe them


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 298 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.1.4 Packing 
Each FANUC-supplied unit, such as a display or operator’s panel, has been designed on the assumption 
that they will be mounted using packing and with the specified screw tightening torque. Failing to mount 
them as specified can lead to unit damage and/or malfunction. Be sure to use packing and observe the 
specified screw tightening torque. When replacing the packing, do so neatly so that no coolant will get in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the unit after replacement. Observe the following precaution when attaching the packing. 
When making screw holes in packing, be careful not to cut to the edge of the packing. Any extra cut can 
let coolant get in the cabinet through the screw hole, causing trouble. 
Screw hole 
Packing 
*) When making screw holes in packing, be careful not to cut to the edge of the packing. 
Screw hole
Packing
Any extra cut can let coolant 
get in the cabinet through the 
screw hole.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screw hole. 
Packing for LCD units, MDI units, and machine operator’s panels
Observe the following rough standards for the thickness and hardness of packing used with LCD units 
(included LCD-mounted control units or display units), MDI units, and main panel of machine operator’s 
panel. 
Thickness : 1.4mm (including double-stick tape) 
Hardness : 8 (Asker C) 
The following models of packing can be purchased from FANUC. These models are electrically


key: chroma:document
string_value:
conductive. When they are used to mount a unit on a cabinet or pendant box, they leave no electrical gap 
between the unit and cabinet or pendant box, being effective in electromagnetic wave shielding and EMC 
measures. 
Ordering information Use 
A02B-0323-K301 For 10.4” LCD unit 
A02B-0323-K304 For 15” LCD unit 
A02B-0323-K310 For MDI unit (ONG, Horizontal) (220 x 230mm) 
A02B-0323-K314 For MDI unit (QWERTY type A or ONG (Vertical)) (160 x 290mm)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A02B-0323-K315 For MDI unit (QWERTY type B) (145 x 400mm) 
A02B-0323-K320 For main panel for machine operator's panel, 
safety machine operator’s panel, or 
safety machine operator’s panel-BK10 (140 x 290mm) 
A02B-0323-K321 For safety machine operator's panel type B, or 
safety machine operator’s panel-BK15 (155 x 400mm) 
A02B-0323-K323 For each sub panel (450mm x 2) 
A02B-0338-K150 For 10.4” LCD/MDI unit (Horizontal) 
A02B-0338-K151 For 10.4” LCD/MDI unit (Vertical)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 299 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
 CAUTION 
1 We have evaluated the above models of packing for many different coolants. 
However, we do not necessarily guarantee that they are resistant to all coolants. 
They are not resistant to, for example, coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a 
high activation level and water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level. 
2 When attaching these models of packing, observe the cautions provided 
together with them.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
together with them. 
We will attach non-conductive packing to a packing box for CNC (LCD unit) as standard. The 
non-conductive packing to be attached as standard is as shown in the table below. Please use it as 
necessary. It is not necessary to use this packing if it is arranged other packing by machine tool bender. 
Ordering information Use 
A02B-0338-K152 
(A250-0945-X016) 
For 10.4 inch LCD/MDI unit (Horizontal) 
A02B-0338-K153 
(A250-0945-X017) 
For 10.4 inch LCD/MDI unit (Vertical)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A02B-0338-K156 
(A98L-0047-0003) 
For 10.4 inch LCD unit 
The packing configuration is 4 sheets in total, 2 sheets in each of the horizontal direction and the vertical 
direction. In the case of non-conductive packing, there is no outside and inside orientation of the packing. 
When using packing to install a LCD unit, MDI unit, or machine operator’s panel in a cabinet or pendant 
box, be careful not to pinch the packing between the mounting surface of the cabinet or pendant box and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the brim of the unit being installed. 
Cabinet, pendant box 
Packing
LCD unit, MDI unit, 
standard machine operator’s 
panel 
When attaching packing, 
be careful not to pinch it.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 300 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.2 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD 
 CAUTION 
 Before starting replacement work, make a backup copy of the contents 
(parameters, programs, etc.) of SRAM in the CNC. The SRAM contents may be 
lost during replacement. See Chapter, “INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA” and 
Appendix, “BOOT SYSTEM” for explanations about how to make backup copies. 
Also see Subsection, “Optional Information File”. 
3.2.1 LCD-mounted Type Control Unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Replacement procedure 
1) Remove each cable from the control unit. Take out the control unit from the cabinet while 
referencing Subsection “Attaching and Detaching Units”. 
2) Detach the two screws in the lower section of the case unit from the main board. The structure is 
such that the two screws will not come off the case unit. 
3) Pull out the case unit while unlatching the claws from the metal bases on both sides in the upper


key: chroma:document
string_value:
section of the case unit. The case unit comes out together with the back panel, fan motor, and lithium 
battery. 
Detach screws 
Claws 
The figure shows 10.4” LCD unit for PANEL iH, however the other 
units are also the same.
Note) The structure is such that the screws will not come off the case.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 301 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
4) Remove the cable from each connector on the main board. Also remove the screws fastening the 
main board. 
CK21A 
Remove the cables (CK20A, CK21A, CA135, CA88A, and CD46A) and 
the screws securing the main board (6 places marked with a black circle). 
CK20A 
CD46A 
CA88A 
CA135 
Note) The figure shows 10.4” LCD unit for PANEL iH, however the other 
units are the same.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
units are the same. 
5) Detach the main board by pulling it down because the main board and fan adapter board is 
connected using the connector CA132 (for the fan adapter board). 
6) Move the card PCBs or FROM/SRAM module from the detached main board to another (replacing) 
main board. 
7) Connect the main board to the fan adapter board and fasten it with screws. Re-attach each cable to 
the main board while exercising care not to attach them incorrectly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8) Place the case in such way that its screws and latches align with their positions, and push it in slowly. 
When pushing it in, make sure that the back panel and main board engage with their respective 
connectors securely and pay attention not to apply an excessive force. After making sure that the 
case unit is latched securely, tighten the case unit screws. Also make sure that the fan motor and 
battery are connected securely.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9) While referencing Subsection, “Attaching and Detaching Units”, attach the control unit to the 
cabinet. Re-attach the cables to the control unit. Be careful not to attach them incorrectly. 
NOTE 
 Once the main board on a control unit with a touch panel is replaced, the touch 
panel needs to be calibrated. See Section "TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION” for 
explanations about how to adjust the touch panel.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 302 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.2.2 Stand-alone Type Control Unit 
Replacement procedure
1) Remove each cable from the control unit. (The lithium battery need not be removed because it is on 
the face plate of the main board.) 
2) Remove the fan unit.(Caution)
3) Hold handles A and B. 
4) Pull out the printed circuit board while pushing down the hook of handle A and pushing up the hook 
of handle B.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of handle B. 
5) After moving the cards and modules from the detached main board to another (replacing) main 
board, attach the replacing main board. 
6) While holding handles A and B, push the main board into the control unit slowly and engage it with 
the back panel connector. Make sure that the hooks of handles A and B have latched on the case. 
7) While referencing Subsection "Stand-alone Type Control Unit” in Section ”REPLACING A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FAN”, attach the fan unit. Note that, unless the main board is engaged with the back panel securely, 
the fan unit cannot be mounted. 
8) Re-attach the cables correctly. 
A
B
The hook is on the upper side.
The hook is on the lower side.
 CAUTION 
 The main board is so structured that it is fastened to the control unit with the fan 
unit. For this reason, the main board cannot be detached if the fan unit is 
mounted on the control unit. Before starting to detach or attach the main board,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
be sure to remove the fan unit. 
See Subsection "Stand-alone Type Control Unit” in Section ”REPLACING A 
FAN” for explanations about how to remove the fan unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 303 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.3 REPLACING LCD UNITS 
 CAUTION 
 Before starting replacement work, make a backup copy of the contents 
(parameters, programs, etc.) of SRAM in the CNC. The SRAM contents may be 
lost during replacement. See Chapter, “INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”, and 
Appendix, “BOOT SYSTEM” for explanations about how to make backup copies. 
Also see Subsection, “Optional Information File”. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
1 See also the descriptions of the main board replacement procedure in 
Subsection, “LCD-mounted Type Control Unit” in Section “REPLACING THE 
MAIN BOARD”. 
2 Once you replace the LCD unit in a control unit with a touch panel, move the 
touch panel control printed circuit board from the replaced LCD unit to the 
replacing LCD unit. Note that the touch panel needs to be calibrated. See 
Section ”TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION” for explanations about how to adjust 
the touch panel.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the touch panel. 
Replacement procedure 
1) Remove the screws from the lower section of the case unit and pull it out while unlatching claws 
from the upper section. 
Detach screws 
Claws 
The figure shows 10.4” LCD unit for PANEL iH, however the other 
units are also the same.
Note) The structure is such that the screws will not come off the case.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 304 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
2) Detach the cable from each connector on the fan adapter and main board. 
3) Remove the screws securing the fan adapter and main board. 
Rear side view of LCD unit CK20A CK21A 
CD46A 
CA88A 
CA135 
Remove the cables (CA158, CK20A, CK21A, CA135, CA88A, and CD46A) and 
the screws securing the fan adapter and main board (8 places marked with a black circle).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Note) The figure shows 10.4” LCD unit for PANEL iH, however the other units are also the same.
CA158 
4) Move the fan adapter and main board to the replacing LCD unit. 
5) Re-attach the cables, screws, and case unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 305 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.4 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS 
 CAUTION 
 Before starting replacement work, make a backup copy of the contents 
(parameters, programs, etc.) of SRAM in the CNC. The SRAM contents may be 
lost during replacement. See Chapter, “INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”, and 
Appendix, “BOOT SYSTEM” for explanations about how to make backup copies. 
Also see Subsection, “Optional Information File”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The GUI card is attached to Type 0 main board for LCD-mounted type control unit. Also, the servo card 
and the CPU card are attached to the main board for stand-alone type control unit. To replace these cards, 
follow the instructions below. A replacement example of the GUI card on Type 0 main board is shown 
here, however the exchange method is same in stand-alone type control unit. 
Method of extraction


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Method of extraction 
1. Unlatch the card PCB (Servo card, CPU card or GUI card) by pulling the claws on the two spacers 
outward. (Fig. a) 
2. Pull the card PCB upward. (Fig. b) 
Spacer 
Fig. a 
Fig. b


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 306 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
Method of insertion 
1. Check that the metal fittings of the spacers are raised. (Fig. a) 
2. To align the card PCB insertion position, touch the spacer fixing end faces of the card PCB with the 
spacers as shown in the figure below. (At this time, the board can be touched with the spacers for 
easier position alignment by slightly holding up the connector side and lowering the spacer side 
only.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
only.) 
3. While aligning the card PCB with the spacers, lower the connector side slowly then cause the 
connectors to touch each other. (Fig. d) 
4. Push the connector side of the card PCB slowly. At this time, push the card board against the board 
on the rear side of the connector. The force required for connector insertion is about 10 kgf. If the 
connector cannot be mated by a force of about 10 kgf or more, the card board may be aligned


key: chroma:document
string_value:
incorrectly, and the connector can break. In this case, realign the card board. 
5. Push in the spacer metal fittings. (Fig. e) 
Connector 
on the back 
Spacer 
Spacer 
Spacer fixing 
end face 
Connector side 
Spacer side 
Fig. c


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 308 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.5 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING FROM/SRAM MODULE 
 CAUTION 
 Before starting replacement work, make a backup copy of the contents of the 
FROM/SRAM module. See Chapter, “INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA” and 
Appendix, “BOOT SYSTEM” for explanations about how to make backup copies 
and how to restore the contents of memory. Also see Subsection, ”Optional 
Information File”. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Information File”. 
NOTE 
 When FROM/SRAM module is exchanged, our service staff installs the system 
software. 
Demounting an FROM/SRAM module 
1) Open the claw of the socket outward. (Fig. a) 
2) Extract the module slantly upward. (Fig. b) 
Mounting an FROM/SRAM module 
1) Insert the module slantly into the module socket, with side B facing upward. (Fig. b) 
2) Push the module downward until it is locked. (Fig. c) At this time, push it down with pushing two 
points of (*) in the figure.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 309 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.6 ATTACHING A COMPACT FLASH CARD ONTO, AND 
DETACHING IT FROM A MAIN BOARD 
 CAUTION 
 Before starting replacement work, make a backup copy of the contents 
(parameters, programs, etc.) of SRAM in the CNC. The SRAM contents may be 
lost during replacement. See Chapter, “INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”, and 
Appendix, “BOOT SYSTEM” for explanations about how to make backup copies. 
Also see Subsection, “Optional Information File”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A main board for Type 0 of LCD-mounted type control unit incorporates a compact flash card. When 
replacing the compact flash card, stick to the following procedures. 
Dismounting procedure 
Pull up and remove the stopper. Turn the latch in the direction opposite to the pulling out direction of the 
Compact flash card and pull out the card. 
Connector 
Compact 
flash card 
Stopper 
Latch 
Mounting procedure 
Insert the card in the connector, and attach the stopper. 
Connector 
Compact


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 310 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.7 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING OPTIONAL BOARDS 
Method of extraction 
1. Detach the cable connected to the optional board and the cable that interferes when the optional 
board is extracted. 
2. Pinch handles A and B. 
3. Pinch handle A, and extract the optional board while disengaging the latch. 
Method of insertion 
 CAUTION 
 Insert the option board all the way through the rack. Turing on the power without


key: chroma:document
string_value:
having it engaged with the back panel connector on the far-side wall of the rack 
may lead to a failure or system alarm. 
1. By holding handles A and B, insert the board into the rack until it reaches the far-side wall of the 
rack to make the back panel engaged with the connector. Make sure that the claw of handle A is 
latched securely and the option board surface is flushed with the ambient surface. 
2. Plug the detached cables again correctly. 
A 
B 
A 
B 
LCD-mounted type Stand-alone type


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 311 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
Option board location 
Which slot is to be used for which option board is predetermined. When adding or maintaining option 
boards for 2slots type LCD-mounted type control unit or 2 slots type stand-alone type control unit, install 
them while observing the following rules. 
 Check the option boards you are going to install with Table 3.7. Insert a board with a smaller


key: chroma:document
string_value:
number and that with a larger number, respectively, into slots 1 and 2. 
Table 3.7 Optional boards 
No. Name 
1 Fast Ethernet board 
2 DeviceNet master board 
3 DeviceNet slave board 
4 PROFIBUS-DP master board 
5 PROFIBUS-DP slave board 
6 HSSB board 
7 CC-Link remote device station board 
LCD-mounted type Stand-alone type Slot 2 Slot 1 
Slot 1 
2 slots 
Slot 2 
2 slots


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 312 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.8 REPLACING FUSES 
 WARNING 
 Before replacement of a blown fuse, the cause of the blown fuse must be 
corrected. So, fuse replacement work must be done only by a person who is 
trained in the related maintenance and safety requirements. When opening the 
cabinet and replacing a fuse inside, be careful not to touch the high-voltage 
circuits (marked with and fitted with an insulating cover). Touching the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock 
hazard. 
3.8.1 LCD-mounted Type Control Unit 
 - Type 0 
Fuse mounting location 
Fuse mounting location 
Rear view of the control unit 
Fuse specification 
Specification Rating 
A02B-0236-K100 5A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 313 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
 - Type 1, 3, 5 
Fuse mounting location 
Fuse mounting location 
Rear view of the control unit
Fuse specification 
Specification Rating 
A02B-0236-K100 5A 
3.8.2 Stand-alone Type Control Unit 
Fuse mounting location 
Fuse
Main board
Fuse burn-out detection LED
The fuse is on the main board. Before replacing the fuse, pull out the main board. See Subsection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
“Stand-alone Type Control Unit” in Section “REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD” for explanations 
about how to pull it out. 
Fuse specification 
Specification Rating 
A02B-0319-K100 5A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 314 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.9 REPLACING THE MEMORY BACKUP BATTERY IN THE 
CONTROL UNIT 
Such as Offset data and system parameters are stored in SRAM in the control unit. The power for the 
SRAM is backed up with a memory backup battery housed in the control unit. Therefore, the above data 
is not lost even if the main power is turned off. 
When the battery voltage falls, alarm message "BAT" blinks on the LCD screen and the battery alarm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
signal is output to the PMC. Once the alarm message starts blinking or the alarm signal is output, replace 
the battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery can be replaced within one week of the alarm first 
being issued. This, however, depends on the system configuration. 
If the battery voltage subsequently drops further, backup of memory can no longer be provided. Turning 
on the power to the control unit in this state causes system alarm to be issued because the contents of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
memory are lost. Replace the battery, clear the entire memory, then reenter the data. 
For this reason, FANUC recommends that the battery be replaced once per year regardless of whether a 
battery alarm is issued. 
Two types of batteries are usable: 
• Lithium battery incorporated in the control unit 
• Commercial alkaline dry cells (R20) inserted in a battery case externally attached to the control unit 
NOTE 
 The control unit is factory-equipped with a lithium battery by default. This battery


key: chroma:document
string_value:
can provide backup for the memory contents for about a year. 
3.9.1 Replacing a Lithium Battery 
For LCD-mounted type control unit 
Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0323-K102). 
<1> Turn the power to the machine (control unit) on. After about 30 seconds, turn the power off. 
<2> Pull out the lithium battery on the back of the control unit. (Hold the latch of the lithium battery, and 
pull the lithium battery toward you while releasing the claw from the case.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 315 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
<3> Mount a new lithium battery you get ready beforehand. (Push the battery until the catch is latched 
with the case.) Confirm that the catch has been latched securely. 
Push the battery until the 
catch is latched with the 
case.
 WARNING 
 Using other than the recommended lithium battery may result in the battery 
exploding. Replace the battery only with the specified lithium battery 
(A02B-0323-K102). 
 CAUTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(A02B-0323-K102). 
 CAUTION 
 Steps <1> to <3> should be completed within 30 minutes. 
 Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified 
period. Otherwise, the contents of SRAM may be lost. 
 Before starting replacement work, save the contents of the SRAM in a batch. 
Even if they are lost, they can be restored easily. 
 For the methods of saving all contents and restoring them, refer to the Chapter, 
“INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”, and APPENDIX, “BOOT SYSTEM”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
 After replacement, dispose the used battery as “industrial waste” correctly 
according to the laws of the country where the machine is installed and the 
ordinances of the local government having jurisdiction over the site of the 
machine. When disposing the battery, insulate it, for example, by taping its 
electrodes in order to prevent a short circuit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 316 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
For stand-alone type control unit 
Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0200-K102). 
<1> Turn the power to the machine (control unit) on. After about 30 seconds, turn the power off. 
<2> Remove the lithium battery on the upper section of the control unit. 
 First, unplug the connector by yanking the battery cable, then take the battery out of its case.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The battery case is located in the upper section of the face plate of the main board. 
<3> Insert a new lithium battery and reconnect the connector. 
Battery case
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Connector
 WARNING 
 Using other than the recommended battery may result in the battery exploding. 
Replace the battery only with the specified battery (A02B-0200-K102). 
 CAUTION 
 Steps <1> to <3> should be completed within 30 minutes.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified 
period. Otherwise, the contents of SRAM may be lost. 
 Before starting replacement work, save the contents of the SRAM in a batch. 
Even if they are lost, they can be restored easily. 
 For the methods of saving all contents and restoring them, refer to the Chapter, 
“INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”, and APPENDIX, “BOOT SYSTEM”. 
NOTE 
1 After replacement, dispose the used battery as “industrial waste” correctly


key: chroma:document
string_value:
according to the laws of the country where the machine is installed and the 
ordinances of the local government having jurisdiction over the site of the 
machine. When disposing the battery, insulate it, for example, by taping its 
electrodes in order to prevent a short circuit. 
2 pulling the cable at an angle may damage the connector. Please be careful and 
pull straight.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 317 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.9.2 Replacing a Commercial D-size Alkaline Dry Cells 
Commercial alkaline dry cells (R20) can be used in place of the lithium battery incorporated in the control 
unit by inserting them in a battery case externally attached to the control unit. 
How to connect the battery case to the control unit 
For the LCD-mounted type control unit, attach a battery cable (A02B-0323-K103) to the battery case


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(A02B-0236-C282). For the stand-alone control unit, use the battery case (A02B-0236-C281), which is 
factory-attached with a battery cable. 
(For LCD-mounted type) (For stand-alone type) 
Example of connecting the battery case to the control unit 
NOTE 
1 The connector of the battery cable has a simplified lock for engagement. So, fix 
the battery cable at a point within a length of 500 mm from the connector 
location with no tension on it in order to prevent the connector from falling due to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
its own weight or any extraneous force. 
2 Keep the battery cable away from any source of noise, such as power wires. 
Replacing a commercial D-size alkaline dry cells 
<1> Prepare two alkaline dry cells (size D) commercially available. 
<2> Turn on the power to the machine (control unit). 
<3> Remove the battery case cover. 
<4> Replace the cells, paying careful attention to their orientation. 
<5> Reinstall the cover onto the battery case. 
 CAUTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CAUTION 
 When replacing the alkaline dry cells while the power is off, use the same 
procedure as that for lithium battery replacement described above. 
Pay attention to the battery polarity. If a battery is installed with incorrect polarity, 
the battery may overheat, blow out, or catch fire.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 318 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
Connection terminal
on the back 
Case
4 mounting
holes 
2 dry cells
Cover
3.10 REPLACING A FAN 
When a reduction in the speed of the fan motor is detected, the FAN warning message blinks on the LCD 
screen. 
When a failure such as stop of the fan motor is detected, an overheat alarm or system alarm is issued and 
the system stops operating. Therefore, as soon as the FAN warning appears, replace the fan motor.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3.10.1 LCD-mounted Type Control Unit 
 - Fan motor specification 
 Specification Remark 
Unit with no option slot A02B-0323-K120 
Unit with a slot for option 2 A02B-0323-K125 
 - Replacing a fan motor 
1. When replacing the fan motor, be sure to turn off the power to the machine (CNC). 
2. Remove the fan motor from the case by holding its latch and pulling it out while releasing the claws 
from the case.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
from the case. 
3. Mount the fan motor to the case. After that, make sure that the fan motor claws have latched the case 
securely. 
To remove the fan motor, hold the latches 
of the fan motor and pull it out. 
When mounting the fan motor, push it in 
until its claws latch the case.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 319 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.10.2 Stand-alone Type Control Unit 
 - Fan unit specification 
仕様 備考
2-slot rack fan unit A02B-0303-C103 
 - Replacing a fan unit 
Detaching a fan unit 
1. When replacing the fan motor, be sure to turn off the power to the machine (control unit). 
2. Push up the latch at the top of the unit until the latch is disengaged. 
Latched Unlatched
Push up the latch.
 CAUTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Push up the latch.
 CAUTION 
 Just disengage the latch. Do not push up the latch after the latch is disengaged. 
If you continue pushing up the latch forcibly, the latch can break. 
3. Place a finger at the bottom of the front of the fan unit then push up the fan unit. 
Push up the fan unit.
4. Push up the fan unit until the fan unit is slanted by about 30 degrees. 
5. Pull out the fan unit toward you in the slanted direction. 
4. Push up the fan unit until it is 
slanted by about 30 degrees.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 320 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
Attaching a fan unit 
1. Insert a fan unit deeply into the main unit at a slanted angle of about 30 degrees until the fan unit 
touches the wall of the main unit. 
2. Lower the fan unit slowly on the main unit. 
3. Push down the fan unit on the near side to couple the fan unit with the top of the main unit. 
1. Insert the fan unit at about 30 
degrees until it touches the 
far-side wall of the main unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. Lower the fan unit slowly. 3. Push down the fan unit to 
connect it to the main unit. 
 CAUTION 
 The fan unit and main board are coupled directly with each other by a connector. 
When mounting the fan unit, failing to follow the connection procedure correctly 
may damage the coupling section of the connector. 
4. Push down the latch at the top of the fan unit for latching. 
Unlatched Latched
4. Push down the latch.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. Push down the latch. 
5. Turn on the power, then check that no fan alarm is issued and that both fans are rotating. 
 CAUTION 
 If the power is turned on without connecting the fan unit correctly, it is likely that 
the fan may not be able to rotate or a fan alarm may be issued even when it 
rotates. After replacement, make sure that the fan rotates normally and no fan 
alarm is issued. 
NOTE 
 When a large amount of force is required to couple the fan unit with the main


key: chroma:document
string_value:
unit, check if pins of the connector of the base printed circuit board are bent and 
if the base printed circuit board is inserted correctly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 321 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.11 Replacing the keyboard cover 
- Keyboard cover specification 
Unit type specification Remark 
Machine operator’s panel main panel 
Safety machine operator’s panel A02B-0323-K041 
Safety machine operator's panel type B 
Safety machine operator's panel-BK10 A02B-0323-K046 Safety machine operator's panel-BK15 
QWERTY type A MDI unit (for PANEL iH) A02B-0323-K049 
QWERTY type B MDI unit (for PANEL iH) A02B-0323-K050


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- How to attach the keyboard cover 
If the unit already has a keyboard cover attached on it, detach the cover from it. Remove any adhesive left 
on it completely, using adhesive tape. Using solvent in attempt to remove any remaining adhesive may 
result being soiled contrary to your expectation. 
Before attaching the keyboard cover, wipe off any soil and smear completely the ornamental frame using


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ethanol or diluted neutral detergent (such as kitchen detergent). If you used neutral detergent, remove any 
remaining detergent, using a cloth wetted with water. Any remaining oily substance or detergent causes 
the keyboard cover to come off easily. After making sure that the ornamental frame is dry, follow the 
procedure below to attach the keyboard cover. 
The keyboard cover exist several types fitted to each unit, but the attachment method is the same. The


key: chroma:document
string_value:
following example shows how to attach to the QWERTY type A MDI unit (for PANEL iH). 
1. There is no standard of position attach the keyboard cover. Peel off the release paper about 1-2 
column of the key from the left or right, position the keyboard cover in such a way that interval of 
molding rising portion of the keyboard cover and key of the corner of the top and bottom to be the 
same. (Fig. 3.11 (a))


key: chroma:document
string_value:
same. (Fig. 3.11 (a)) 
2. While peel off the release paper, attach the keyboard cover. At that time, be aware of the following. 
(a) Do not touch the adhesive portion of the double-sided tape. 
(b) The keyboard cover is made of soft material, it will be deformed by pulling. So attach to not to 
pull. 
3. Press it firmly while stroking the both-side adhesive tape section. (Fig. 3.11(b))


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 322 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
Both-side adhesive tape 
(Hatched area) 
These intervals to be 
the same, position the 
keyboard cover.
Fig. 3.11(a) Fig. 3.11(b)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 323 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
め用テープ
3.12 REPLACING THE TOUCH PANEL PROTECTION SHEET 
For the unit with a touch panel, the surface of the touch panel is covered with the protection sheet to 
protect it. When there are flaws and contamination on this protection sheet that make the screen hard to 
read, replace the protection sheet. Refer to the following for protection sheet specifications. 
Touch panel protection sheet specification


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Screen size Specification Remark 
For 10.4” LCD (Non-glare type) A08B-0090-K040 
For 15” LCD (Non-glare type) A08B-0090-K041 
For 10.4” LCD (Clear type) A08B-0090-K043 
For 15” LCD (Clear type) A08B-0090-K044 
If you put the protection sheet in incorrect way to replace it, malfunctions may occur. So follow the below 
steps to put the protection sheet on a touch panel. 
 - Replacement procedure 
1) Remove the old protection sheet


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Peel off the old protection sheet, and remove the stains on the display. 
2) Tack a protection sheet 
Remove foreign matter, for example, the dusts and stains by using an air spray in advance. 
As shown in figure below, secure the sheet in two places with tacking tapes, and then tack the 
protection sheet on the center of display area. 
NOTE) In case that the unit is mounted on the machine, tack the sheet in same way. 
NOTE 
 The size of the protection sheet is slightly smaller than display area.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
 After tacking the protection sheet, make sure that the sheet does not stick out 
from the display area. 
 Getting on rubber gloves is recommended when you use gloves at this 
replacement work. 
Touch panel protection sheet (shaded area) 
Non-glare type 
A08B-0090-K040 for 10.4” 
A08B-0090-K041 for 15” 
Clear type 
A08B-0090-K043 for 10.4” 
A08B-0090-K044 for 15” 
Tacking tapes


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 324 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3) Put a protection sheet 
Follow the below steps to put the protection sheet on the display area. 
 Peel off a back film of the protection sheet to halves. At this time, be careful the tacking tapes 
not to move out of position. 
 Put the sheet slowly from tacking tapes side with its adsorption power only. 
Do not press down the sheet halfway.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
 While putting the sheet, be careful not to entering dusts and air bubbles, for example. 
 When you have finished, make sure that the sheet fits inside the display area. 
If the sheet protrudes from the display area, put the sheet again. 
NOTE) In case that the unit is mounted on the machine, put the sheet in the same way. 
Put the sheet slowly on 
display from tacking 
tapes side.
Put with the adsorption 
power of the sheet only 
(Do not press).
Be careful not to entering


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Be careful not to entering 
dusts and air bubbles (In 
particular, just before 
finish putting).
Backside film
Protection sheet
LCD unit
Screen area
Tacking tapes
Put slowly
[Overview of putting] [When the unit is mounted the machine]
NOTE 
 Be careful not to leave air bubbles and dusts between the sheet and the display 
surface. However air bubbles smaller than 5mm will disappear over time, about 
from an hour to eight hours.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
from an hour to eight hours. 
 When air bubbles and dusts enter between the sheet and the display surface, 
peel off the sheet slowly and remove them. You can cleanly remove the dusts by 
using the tapes have weak adhesive power.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 325 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
 CAUTION 
 When you put the sheet on the display, put with its adsorption power only. 
Do not apply a force to the sheet by your hands during putting it, or the sheet is 
distorted and malfunctions may occur. 
[Wrong example] 
Do not put with applying a force to the sheet 
Protection 
sheet 
Backside film 
Tacking tapes Screen area 
LCD unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 326 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
4) Finish 
After putting the protection sheet, peel off the tacking tapes. 
Air bubbles may remain on the edges of the sheet. In this case, remove the air bubbles as to push out 
it from center to outer. 
Air bubbles smaller than 5mm will disappear over time, about from an hour to eight hours. 
In case that you cannot remove the fine air bubbles, you should try to give it more time and check if 
the air bubbles disappear. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
 Use the cleaning cloth, for example a display cloth, when you stroke the 
protection sheet for finishing. 
 CAUTION 
 Please be careful not to press too strongly when operating with a finger. There is 
a risk that internal circuit of the touch panel fails or the glass cracks. 
5) Touch panel calibration 
Calibrate the touch panel by following instructions shown in the section 3.14, and check that it 
functions normally after putting the protection sheet. 
6) Operation check


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6) Operation check 
After calibration, please check the following points to see if the touch panel is working properly. 
 There is no deviation between the pressed position and the reacting position. 
 There is no place where does not react even if it is pressed. 
 Does not action while the touch panel is not pushed. 
If the touch panel is not working properly, try to peel off the sheet and put it again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 327 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
3.13 TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION 
 - Conditions that require calibration 
When the pushing position and the recognition position shift, execute the calibration. 
And, when the maintenance work is done, the calibration might be needed. 
Touch panel calibration is needed under the following conditions: 
1. The LCD mounted type control unit with a touch panel was replaced.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. The main board on the LCD mounted type control unit with a touch panel was replaced. 
3. The touch panel control board was replaced. 
4. Memory all clear was performed. 
5. The touch panel protection sheet was replaced. 
 - Related Parameters 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
3113 DCL 
 [Input type] Parameter input 
 [Data type] Bit 
 #5 DCL The touch panel compensation screen is: 
0: Disabled. 
1: Enabled. 
Set this parameter to 0 usually. Touch panel compensation becomes necessary only when


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the panel is replaced or memory all clear operation is performed. Set this parameter to 1 
only when performing touch panel compensation. Upon completion of compensation, set 
this parameter to 0. 
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 
3119 DDS 
 [Input type] Parameter input 
 [Data type] Bit 
NOTE 
 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is 
continued. 
 #2 DDS The touch panel is: 
0: Enabled. 
1: Disabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0: Enabled. 
1: Disabled. 
Set this parameter to 1 when disabling the touch panel temporarily, for example, at 
start-up time. 
 - Touch panel calibration method 
NOTE 
 How to calibrate the touch panel used with the display unit for the LCD-mounted 
control unit (for PANEL iH) is explained later. 
Calibration procedure 
<1> Enable the touch panel calibration screen.(Set bit 5 (DCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 1.) 
<2> Press function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<2> Press function key . 
<3> Press the continuous menu key several times. The [TOUCH PANEL] soft key is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01
- 328 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
<4> Press the [TOUCH PANEL] soft key then the [(OPRT)] soft key. The [TP CAL] soft key is 
displayed. 
<5> Pressing the [TP CAL] soft key causes a full-screen touch panel calibration screen to appear. 
<6> Click the 9 calibration points with a stylus pen. The marker of a normally clicked point changes 
from "+" to "o". If you fail to click right on a "+" mark, the message "Your stylus pen is not right on


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a "+" mark. Click again." appears. 
<7> After clicking all 9 calibration points, clicking the key completes calibration. To quit or retry 
calibration, click the key. The previous screen appears again. Before clicking 9 calibration 
points, clicking the key aborts calibration. 
<8> When calibration ends normally, the message "Calibration ended" appears. 
<9> After completing calibration, disable the touch panel calibration screen (by resetting the DCL


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 
- 329 - 
3. REPLACING CONTROL UNIT 
MAINTENANCE PARTS 
- Touch panel calibration method (for display unit for PANEL iH) 
1. Press [SETTING] in the [UTILITY] category. 
2. Press [General Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Touch Panel Setting] in the 
setting item display field. 
3. Follow the prompts to correct the settings of the touch panel. 
NOTE 
 According to machine tool, touch panel calibration may be executed by different


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 330 - 
4 MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS 
4.1 CAUTIONS COMMON TO THE OTHER UNITS 
 - Replacing fuses 
 WARNING 
 Before replacement of a blown fuse, the cause of the blown fuse must be 
corrected. So, fuse replacement work must be done only by a person who is 
trained in the related maintenance and safety requirements. When opening the 
cabinet and replacing a fuse inside, be careful not to touch the high-voltage


key: chroma:document
string_value:
circuits (marked with and fitted with an insulating cover). Touching the 
uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock 
hazard. 
See the descriptions of each unit in this chapter for the locations of their fuses. 
See also Appendix, “LISTS OF UNITS, PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS, AND CONSUMABLES” for 
the specifications of the fuses for each unit.
4.2 UNITS SUPPORTING I/O Link i
4.2.1 Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Meanings of LED displays on units supporting I/O Link i
The standard I/O Link i incorporates three LEDs, “LINK” (green), “ALM” (red), and “FUSE” (red) for 
each unit separately. The information represented using each LED is as follows:
LED「LINK」(green) Indicates the status of communication by the unit of interest. 
LED「ALM」(red) Indicates that an alarm has been issued in the unit of interest. 
LED「FUSE」(red) Indicates where there is a blown fuse in the unit of interest.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
See Section “LEDS ON UNITS SUPPORTING I/O LINK i” for descriptions of the on/off states of the 
LEDs and their meanings. 
 - Status Alarm 
Some I/O units have a function which detects unit errors including DO alarms (ground faults) and DO 
common voltage errors. 
With the I/O Link i, detected information is called a status alarm, and the CNC is notified of the status 
alarm separate from DI signals. For this reason, it is not necessary to assign the information to X


key: chroma:document
string_value:
addresses. If an error occurs, the following PMC alarm message is displayed on the PMC alarm screen. 
“WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm Ybbb= **H )” 
This message indicates that the DO alarm occurs at "zz" byte of slot "yy" of group "xx" in channel "n", Y 
“bbbb” address of PMC path "m". The “**H” shows some bits at which the alarm occurs by hexadecimal. 
See the descriptions of each unit in this section for the correspondence between “zz”byte of slot “yy” in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
that message and where alarm occurs in each unit. 
In addition, information of status alarm including DO alarms is also output to the system relay area. For 
details of the system relay area, refer to the FANUC Series 0i-MODEL F Plus CONNECTION 
MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B-64693EN).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 331 - 
NOTE 
 Status alarm cannot be cleared without power off. After turning the power off, 
please correct the cause of alarm and turn the power on again. 
4.2.2 I/O Module for Connector Panel [Supporting I/O Link i]
 - Specification 
Name Ordering specifications Specification 
I/O module for connector panel 
(basic module) A03B-0824-C001 DI/DO : 24/16 
I/O module for connector panel 
(extension module A) A03B-0824-C002 DI/DO : 24/16


key: chroma:document
string_value:
With MPG interface 
I/O module for connector panel 
(extension module B) A03B-0824-C003 DI/DO : 24/16 
Without MPG interface 
I/O module for connector panel 
(extension module C) A03B-0824-C004 DO : 16 
2A output module 
I/O module for connector panel 
(extension module D) A03B-0824-C005 Analog input module 
Fuse (spare parts) A03B-0815-K002 1A 
(For basic module) 
Flat cable between modules A03B-0815-K100 20 mm long 
Suitable for a module interval of 32 mm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 332 - 
 - Connector and fuse locations 
Cable for I/O Link 
Cable for manual pulse generator 
Basic module 
Extension module 1 
(with manual pulse generator interface) 
Extension module 2 
Extension module 3 
Flat cable between modules 
JD1A JD1B 
Fuse 
JA3 
CA137 
CA137 
CA138 
Connector number Use 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
JA3 Manual pulse generator 
CA137 Later stage in inter-module connection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 333 - 
 - LED 
The basic module incorporates a green LED, “LINK”, and two red LEDs, “ALM” and “FUSE”. 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for descriptions of the correspondence 
between the on/off state of each LED and the status of the I/O module for connector panel. 
ALM (red) 
LINK (green) 
FUSE (red) 
JD1A JD1B 
 - Rotary switch 
 CAUTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Rotary switch 
 CAUTION 
 The rotary switch on each extension module is used to connect them by skipping 
other extension modules (slots). 
When replacing extension modules, set the rotary switch on a replacing module in 
the same manner as for the replaced module. 
Method of setting (control and setting method)
A control (rotary switch) is provided on the location shown below of each expansion module. When


key: chroma:document
string_value:
changing the setting, turn the rotary switch with a flat-blade screwdriver with a tip diameter of about 2.5 
mm.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 334 - 
 - Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location 
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm 
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs. 
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs. 
PMC alarm message 
Slot number Faulty location 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz


key: chroma:document
string_value:
address 
zz 
01 00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Basic module 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte of Basic module 
02 00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Extension module1 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte of Extension module1 
03 00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Extension module2 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte of Extension module2 
04 00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Extension module3 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte of Extension module3


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4.2.3 I/O Module for Operator’s Panel (Supporting Matrix Input) 
[Supporting I/O Link i] 
 - Specification 
Name Specification Remark 
I/O module for operator’s panel A03B-0824-K200 
(A20B-2102-0170) 
Fuse (spare parts) A03B-0815-K001 1A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 335 - 
 - Connector, LED, and fuse locations 
JD1A 
JD1B 
Fuse 
JA3 
CE53 CE54 CPD1 
ALM LED (red) 
LINK LED (green) FUSE LED (red) 
Connector number Use 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
JA3 Manual pulse generator 
CPD1 24VDC input/output 
CE53 DI/DO connector 1 
CE54 DI/DO connector 2 
 - LED 
The I/O module for operator’s panel incorporates a green LED, “LINK”, and two red LEDs, “ALM” and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
“FUSE” in above figure. 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for descriptions of the correspondence 
between the on/off state of each LED and the status of the I/O module for operator’s panel. 
 - Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location 
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm 
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs. (Attention: DO alarm is detected not for each bit but for each byte in this module. It 
cannot be detected in which bit a DO alarm occurs. “01H” is displayed in the alarm message whichever 
bit a DO alarm occurs.) 
PMC alarm message 
Slot number Faulty location 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
01 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte


key: chroma:document
string_value:
02 DO alarm occurs at 2nd byte 
03 DO alarm occurs at 3rd byte 
04 DO alarm occurs at 4th byte 
05 DO alarm occurs at 5th byte 
06 DO alarm occurs at 6th byte


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 336 - 
4.2.4 Connection of I/O Module for Operator's Panel and I/O 
Module for Power Magnetics Cabinet [Supporting I/O Link i] 
- Specification 
Item Ordering specifications Remarks 
I/O module for operator’s panel 
(with MPG interface) 
A03B-0824-K202 
(A20B-2004-0690) 
DI : 48 points 
DO : 32 points 
With MPG interface 
I/O module for power magnetics cabinet 
(without MPG interface) 
A03B-0824-K203 
(A20B-2004-0691) 
DI : 48 points


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DI : 48 points 
DO : 32 points 
Without MPG interface 
Fuse (spare parts) A03B-0815-K001 1A 
 - Connector, LED, and fuse locations 
JD1A 
JD1B 
Fuse 
JA3 
CE56 CE57 CPD1 
ALM LED (red) 
LINK LED (green) FUSE LED (red) 
Connector number Use 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
JA3 Manual pulse generator 
CPD1 24VDC input/output 
CE56 DI/D connector 1 
CE57 DI/DO connector 2 
 - LED


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- LED 
The I/O module for operator’s panel incorporates a green LED, “LINK”, and two red LEDs, “ALM” and 
“FUSE” in above figure. 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for descriptions of the correspondence 
between the on/off state of each LED and the status of the I/O module for operator’s panel.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 337 - 
 - Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location 
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm 
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs. 
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs. 
PMC alarm message 
Slot number Faulty location 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
01


key: chroma:document
string_value:
address 
zz 
01 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte 
02 DO alarm occurs at 2nd byte 
03 DO alarm occurs at 3rd byte 
4.2.5 I/O Module Type-2 for Connector Panel [Supporting I/O Link i] 
 - Specification 
Item Ordering specifications Specification 
I/O module type-2 for connector panel 
(basic module B1) 
A03B-0824-C040 DI/DO=48/32 
With MPG interface 
I/O module type-2 for connector panel 
(basic module B2) 
A03B-0824-C041 DI/DO=48/32 
Without MPG interface


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Without MPG interface 
I/O module type-2 for connector panel 
(extension module E1) 
A03B-0824-C042 DI/DO=48/32 
Fuse (spare parts) A03B-0815-K002 1 A (for basic module) 
Inter-module flat cable A03B-0815-K102 Cable length: 35 mm 
Module interval: 5 mm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 338 - 
 - Connector, LED, and fuse locations 
JD1B
JD1A
Fuse 
Flat cable for 
module connection 
Basic module 
Extension module JA3
FUSE LED 
(red) 
LINK LED 
(green) 
ALM LED 
(red) 
Basic module 
Connector number Use 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
JA3 Manual pulse generator 
CA140 Inter-module connection (basic) 
CA141 Inter-module connection (extension) 
CA140 
CA141 
 - LED


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CA140 
CA141 
 - LED 
The basic module incorporates a green LED, “LINK”, and two red LEDs, “ALM” and “FUSE”. 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for descriptions of the correspondence 
between the on/off state of each LED and the status of the I/O module type-2 for connector panel. 
 - Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location 
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs. 
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 339 - 
PMC alarm message 
Slot number Faulty location 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
01 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Basic module 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte of Basic module 
02 DO alarm occurs at 2nd byte of Basic module 
03 DO alarm occurs at 3rd byte of Basic module 
02 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Extension module 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte of Extension module 
02 DO alarm occurs at 2nd byte of Extension module


key: chroma:document
string_value:
03 DO alarm occurs at 3rd byte of Extension module 
4.2.6 Terminal Type I/O Module [Supporting I/O Link i] 
 - Specification 
Item Ordering specifications Specification 
Basic module A03B-0823-C011 DI/DO: 24/16 
Extension module A A03B-0823-C012 DI/DO : 24/16 
With MPG interface 
Extension module B A03B-0823-C013 DI/DO : 24/16 
Without MPG interface 
Extension module C A03B-0823-C014 DO : 16 
2-A output module 
Extension module D A03B-0823-C015 Analog input module


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Extension module E A03B-0823-C016 Analog output module 
Fuse (spare parts) A03B-0823-K001 2A (for basic module) 
Spare terminal block set 
(for basic module and extension 
module A/B) 
A03B-0823-K020 Cable-side terminal block set (including each 
of T1 through T4) 
Spare terminal block set 
(for extension module C) A03B-0823-K011 Cable-side terminal block set (including each 
of T1 and T2) 
Spare terminal block set


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Spare terminal block set 
(for extension module D) A03B-0823-K012 Cable-side terminal block set (including each 
of T1 and T2) 
Spare terminal block set 
(for extension module E) A03B-0823-K013 Cable-side terminal block set (including each 
of T1 and T2) 
Inter-module cable A A03B-0823-K100 Cable length: 100 mm, 52 pins 
Used for extension module connection 
NOTE 
 The spare terminal board set is a replacement set for a cable-side terminal board 
supplied with the main unit.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 340 - 
 - Locations of connectors, fuses, LEDs, etc. 
Ground terminal 
CA105 
As seen from A in figure at left. 
DI/DO status display LED
T1 
T2 
T4 
T3 
CP11 
Blown fuse display LED 
JD1B 
JD1A 
A (See figure at right.)
Fuse, 2 A 
Connector / 
terminal 
board 
number 
Use 
CP11 24-VDC power supply input 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
CA105 Extension module connection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label 
T2 DO terminal board with lime green 
label 
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label 
T4 DI terminal board with pink label 
Basic module A03B－0823－C011 
Communication 
status display 
LED 
Alarm status 
display LED 
Meanings of LED displays 
LED Meaning 
LINK Status of communication 
ALM Occurrence of alarm 
FUSE Blown fuse 
See Subsection 4.2.1 for the 
correspondence between the on/off state of 
each LED and the status of the terminal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
board type I/O module. 
DO 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Light when DO is ON. 
DI 0 to 7 (3 bytes) Light when DI is ON.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 341 - 
DI/DO status display LED 
JA3 
A (See figure at right.)
Rotary switch 
T1 T2 
T4 
T3 
Connector / 
terminal 
board 
number 
Use 
JA3 MPG interface 
CA105 Extension module connection 
(to next-stage extension module) 
CA106 Extension module connection 
(to previous-stage basic module) 
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label 
T2 DO terminal board with lime green 
label 
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T4 DI terminal board with pink label 
CA105 
CA106 
As seen from A in figure at left. 
(Common to A03B-0823-C012 and A03B-0823-C013) 
A DI/DO status display LED (See figure at right.)
Rotary switch 
T1 
T2 
T4 
T3 
Connector / 
terminal 
board 
number 
Use 
CA105 Extension module connection 
(to next-stage extension module) 
CA106 Extension module connection 
(to previous-stage basic module) 
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label 
T2 DO terminal board with lime green 
label


key: chroma:document
string_value:
label 
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label 
T4 DI terminal board with pink label 
Extension module A A03B－0823－C012 
Extension module B A03B－0823－C013 
S S
S S
Meanings of LED displays 
(Common to A03B-0823-C012 and A03B-0823-C013)
LED Meaning 
DO 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Light when DO is ON. 
DI 0 to 7 (3 bytes) Light when DI is ON.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 342 - 
DO status display LED (green) 
A DO alarm display LED (red) (See figure at right.)
T1 
T2 
Rotary switch 
CA105 
CA106 
As seen from A in figure at left. (Common to 
A03B-0823-C014 and A03B-0823-C015) 
Connector / 
terminal 
board 
number 
Use 
CA105 Extension module connection 
(to next-stage expansion module) 
CA106 Extension module connection 
(to previous-stage basic or extension 
module) 
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T2 DO terminal board with lime green label 
A (See figure at right.)
T1 
T2 
Rotary switch 
Connector / 
terminal 
board 
number 
Use 
CA105 Extension module connection 
(to next-stage expansion module) 
CA106 Extension module connection 
(to previous-stage basic or extension 
module) 
T1 Analog input CH1 and CH2 terminal board 
with yellow label 
T2 Analog input CH3 and CH4 terminal board 
with pink label 
Extension module C A03B－0823－C014 
Extension module D A03B－0823－C015


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Meanings of LED displays 
LED Meaning 
DO 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Light when DO is ON. 
ALARM 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Light to indicate an alarm.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 343 - 
A (See figure at right.)
T1 
T2 
Rotary switch 
CA105 
CA106 
As seen from A in figure at left. 
Connector / 
terminal 
board 
number 
Use 
CA105 Extension module connection 
(to next-stage expansion module) 
CA106 Extension module connection 
(to previous-stage basic or extension 
module) 
T1 Analog output CH1 and CH2 terminal 
board with lime green label 
T2 Analog output CH3 and CH4 terminal 
board with sky blue label


key: chroma:document
string_value:
board with sky blue label 
Extension module E A03B－0823－C016 
 States when the protection function is activated in extension module C 
The following table lists the DO output and alarm data states when a DO error occurs in extension 
module C and the protection function is activated. 
State PMC output Module DO 
output 
DO state 
indication 
LED (green) 
DO alarm LED 
(red) Alarm data 
Normal operation 0 OFF Turned off Turned off 0 
1 ON Turned on Turned off 0 
Overheat protection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Overheat protection 
function operation 
0 OFF Turned off Turned off 0 
1 OFF Turned off Turned on 1 
Over voltage protection 
function operation 
0 OFF Turned off Turned off 0 
1 OFF Turned off Turned off 0 
Disconnection detection 0 OFF Turned off Turned off 0 
1 ON Turned on Turned on 1 
NOTE 
1 The DO alarm is input not in the PMC system relay area, but in the area at the 
DI address. It is not concerned with the connection method.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 If the overheat protection function or over voltage protection function among the 
protection functions above is activated, the DO bit is kept OFF until the cause is 
eliminated. When the cause is eliminated, the DO bit is set to ON without 
restarting the system.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 344 - 
NOTE 
3 Disconnection detection is performed by monitoring, with an output element in 
the module, the current flowing through a load when DO output is ON. When the 
detected current value is about 200 mA or less, disconnection detection is 
assumed. So, when a device (such as an LED) with a small load current is 
connected, the DO alarm state results, assuming disconnection detection. Unlike


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the other protection functions, however, this function does not turn off DO output. 
If a connection is reactivated after the state of disconnection is once set, 
disconnection detection is canceled without restarting the system. 
4 When the ratings current value of the load is larger than the disconnection 
detection current value, and the rise time of the current that flows to the 
connected load (such as an solenoid) is late, the disconnection detection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
function might work. For that case, the disconnection detecting function when 
DO output is ON can be evaded by programming it to refer to DO alarm 
allocated to DI after the fixed time has passed since DO was turned on. 
 - Rotary switch 
 CAUTION 
 When replacing extension modules, set the rotary switch on a replacing module in 
the same manner as for the replaced module. 
Re-setting the rotary switch on each extension module can be used to connect them by skipping other


key: chroma:document
string_value:
modules. For details, see descriptions of the rotary switch in Subsection 4.2.2, “I/O module for connector 
panel”. 
 - Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location 
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm 
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs. 
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs. 
PMC alarm message


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PMC alarm message 
Slot number Faulty location 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
01 00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Basic module 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte of Basic module 
02 00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Extension module1 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte of Extension module1 
03 00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Extension module2 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte of Extension module2 
04 00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte of Extension module3


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 345 - 
4.2.7 I/O Link Connection Unit [Supporting I/O Link i] 
Specification 
Name Specification 
I/O Link connection unit A02B-0333-C250 
Fuse 1A (spare parts, 1 piece） A03B-0815-K001 
Connector and fuse locations 
JD1B1 
JD1A1 
CP1 (IN) 
JD1B2 
JD1A2 
CP2 (IN) 
GND 
F1 (FUSE1) F2 (FUSE2) 
Connector number and fuse number Application 
CP1 (IN) 24 VDC power input (channel 1) 
CP2 (IN) 24 VDC power input (channel 2)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
JD1B1,JD1A1 I/O Link interface (channel 1) 
JD1B2,JD1A2 I/O Link interface (channel 2) 
GND Signal ground terminal 
F1 (FUSE1) Fuse (channel 2, LED “FUSE1” lights if the relevant fuse blows) 
F2 (FUSE2) Fuse (channel 2, LED “FUSE2” lights if the relevant fuse blows)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 346 - 
 - LED display 
The I/O Link connection unit has two I/O Link channels, each incorporating a green LED, “LINKn”, and 
two red LEDs, “ALMn” and “FUSEn”, (where n is 1 or 2) as shown below. 
FUSE 1 (red)
LINK 1 (green)
ALM1 (red)
ALM2 (red)
LINK 2 (green)
FUSE 2 (red)
Channel 1 
Channel 2 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for the correspondence between the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
on/off state of each LED and the status of the I/O Link connection unit. 
 CAUTION 
 The I/O Link connection unit has two I/O Link channels, each having to be 
supplied with 24 V. 
If the LED “LINK1” neither steadily lights nor blinks, check for 24 V on the 
connector CP1. 
If the LED “LINK2” neither steadily lights nor blinks, check for 24 V on the 
connector CP2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 347 - 
4.2.8 Machine Operator's Panel [Supporting I/O Link i] 
 - Specification 
Name Specification Remarks 
Standard machine operators panel Main panel A02B-0323-C231 
Safety machine operators panel A02B-0323-C234 
Safety machine operators panel type B A02B-0323-C235 
Standard machine operators panel Sub panel AA A02B-0236-C237 
Standard machine operators panel Sub panel D A02B-0236-C244 
Set of transparent key tops (55 key tops) A02B-0236-K170


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Set of blank key tops (55 key tops) A02B-0236-K171 For Standard machine operators panel 
Main panel 
A02B-0323-K171 For Safety machine operators panel and 
Safety machine operators panel type B 
Set of symbol English key tops 
 (34 labeled key tops + 21 blank key tops) 
A02B-0236-K174 For Standard machine operators panel 
Main panel 
A02B-0323-K174 For Safety machine operators panel and 
Safety machine operators panel type B 
Set of blank key tops 
(100 red blank key tops)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(100 red blank key tops) 
A02B-0236-K175 For Standard machine operators panel 
Main panel 
A02B-0323-K175 For Safety machine operators panel and 
Safety machine operators panel type B 
Set of blank key tops 
(100 green blank key tops) 
A02B-0236-K176 For Standard machine operators panel 
Main panel 
A02B-0323-K176 For Safety machine operators panel and 
Safety machine operators panel type B 
Set of blank key tops 
(100 blue blank key tops) 
A02B-0236-K177 For Standard machine operators panel


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Main panel 
A02B-0323-K177 For Safety machine operators panel and 
Safety machine operators panel type B 
Set of blank key tops 
(100 yellow blank key tops) 
A02B-0236-K178 For Standard machine operators panel 
Main panel 
A02B-0323-K178 For Safety machine operators panel and 
Safety machine operators panel type B 
Keyboard cover A02B-0323-K041 For Standard machine operators panel 
Main panel , Safety machine operators 
panel and Safety machine operators 
panel type B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
panel type B 
Screw caps (with 5 pieces included) A02B-0319-K191 
Fuse 1A (spare parts) A03B-0815-K001


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 348 - 
 - Connector and fuse locations 
 Standard machine operators panel main panel 
CM68 CM69 CM67 
Rear view of main panel 
CM66 CM65 CA65 
JA58 JA3 CA64 JD1B JD1A 
Fuse 
ALM LED 
(red) 
LINK LED 
(green) FUSE LED 
(red) PCB 
Ground terminal 
Connector number Use 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
JA3 Manual pulse generator 
JA58 Pendant type manual pulse generator 
CA64 24VDC input/output


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CA64 24VDC input/output 
CA65 Connection to power magnetics cabinet 
CM65 Rotary switch 
CM66 Rotary switch 
CM67 Memory protect, emergency stop signal 
CM68 General purpose DI/DO 
CM69 General purpose DI/DO


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 349 - 
 Safety machine operators panel, Safety machine operators panel type B 
CM68 CM69 CM157 
Rear view of safety machine operator’s panel 
CM67 CM65 CM66 
JA58 
JA3 
CA64 
JD1B JD1A 
Fuse 
ALM 
(PMC) 
ALM2 
(DCSPMC) 
LINK 
(PMC) 
LINK2 
(DCSPMC) 
FUSE 
PCB 
Ground terminal 
Connector number Use 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
JA3 Manual pulse generator 
JA58 Pendant type manual pulse generator


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CA64 24VDC input/output 
CM65 Rotary switch 
CM66 Rotary switch 
CM67 Memory protect, emergency stop signal 
CM68 General purpose DI/DO 
CM69 General purpose DI/DO 
CA157 General purpose DI LED 
 - LED 
The printed circuit board on the rear of the main panel machine operator's panel incorporates a green LED, 
“LINK”, and two red LEDs, “ALM” and “FUSE”, as shown above. 
The printed circuit board on the rear of the safety machine operator's panel and safety machine operator’s


key: chroma:document
string_value:
panel and safety machine operator’s panel type B incorporates two green LED, “LINK” and “LINK2”, 
and three red LEDs, “ALM”, ”ALM2”and “FUSE”, as shown above. 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for the correspondence between the 
on/off state of each LED and the status of the main panel. 
 - Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location 
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs. 
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs. (Attention: DO alarm does not occur at 0th through 4th byte.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 350 - 
PMC alarm message 
Slot number Faulty location 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
01 
05 DO alarm occurs at 5th byte 
06 DO alarm occurs at 6th byte 
07 DO alarm occurs at 7th byte 
4.2.9 Operator's Panel Connection Unit [Supporting I/O Link i] 
 - Specifications 
Item Ordering specifications Specification 
Operator's panel connection unit 
(source DO) A16B-2204-0260 DI : 96 points 
DO : 64 points 
Operator's panel connection unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(source DO) A16B-2204-0261 DI : 64 points 
DO : 32 points 
Fuse (spare parts) A02B-0163-K111 3.2A 
 - Connector, LED, and fuse locations 
Fuse 
ALM LED (red) 
LINK LED (green) 
FUSE LED (red) 
Connector number Use 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
CP61 24VDC input 
CM51 DI/DO connector 
CM52 DI/DO connector 
CMB3 DI/DO connector 
CMB4 DI/DO connector 
 - LED 
This printed circuit board incorporates a green LED, “LINK”, and two red LEDs, “ALM” and “FUSE” in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 351 - 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for descriptions of the correspondence 
between the on/off state of each LED and the status of the operator's panel connection unit. 
 Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location 
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm 
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs. 
For A16B-2204-0260 
PMC alarm message 
Slot number Faulty location 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
01 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte 
02 DO alarm occurs at 2nd byte 
03 DO alarm occurs at 3rd byte 
04 DO alarm occurs at 4th byte 
05 DO alarm occurs at 5th byte 
06 DO alarm occurs at 6th byte 
07 DO alarm occurs at 7th byte


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For A16B-2204-0261 
PMC alarm message 
Slot number Faulty location 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
01 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte 
02 DO alarm occurs at 2nd byte 
03 DO alarm occurs at 3rd byte


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 352 - 
4.2.10 Safety IO unit [for I/O Link i only] 
 - Specification
Name Order specification Remarks 
Safety IO Unit A03B-0821-C002 
Fuse (Spare parts) A03B-0815-K001 1A 
 - Connector, LED, and fuse locations 
Bottom 
FG 
Fuse （1A）
A03B-0815-K001
Connect to FG of power magnetic cabinet 
Connector for 24VDC 
power supply 
Fasten terminal for frame ground 
CNA1 
CNA2 
CNA3 
CNA4 
CNA5 
CNA6 
CNA7 
CNA8 
CNA9 
CNA10 
CP1 
JD1B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNA9 
CNA10 
CP1 
JD1B 
JD1A 
ALM 
LINK 
ALM 
LINK 
FUSE POW 
CNB1 
CNB2 
CNB3 
CNB4 
CNB5 
CNB6 
CNB7 
CNB8 
CNB9 
Connector for DI/DO Connector for DI/DO 
LED 
LED 
Connector for I/O Link i
1st 
GROUP 
2nd 
GROUP


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 353 - 
Connector number Application 
CP1 24 VDC power input 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
CNA1－10 DI/DO 
CNB1-9 DI/DO 
 - LED 
This printed circuit board incorporates three green LEDs, “POW” and “LINK”, and three red LEDs, 
“ALM” and “FUSE” in above figure. 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for descriptions of the correspondence


key: chroma:document
string_value:
between the on/off state of each LED and the status of Safety IO unit. 
 - Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location 
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm 
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs. 
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs. 
PMC alarm message 
Group number Faulty location 
Gyy 
Slot number 
Syy


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Gyy 
Slot number 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
0 to 23 
(1st group 
in PMC) 
01 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte in PMC 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte in PMC 
0 to 23 
(2nd group 
in DCSPMC) 
01 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte in DCSPMC 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte in DCSPMC 
4.2.11 I/O module for operator's panel supporting safety function 
[for I/O Link i only] 
 - Specification
Name Order specification Remarks 
I/O module for operator's panel


key: chroma:document
string_value:
supporting safety function (type A) A20B-2200-0471 
I/O module for operator's panel 
supporting safety function (type B) A20B-2200-0470 
Fuse (Spare parts) A03B-0815-K001 1A 
 - Connector, LED, and fuse locations 
JD1A JD1B JA60 CE76 
CP1 
CE75 
FUSE1 
LINK2 
ALM1 
ALM2 
LINK1 
Fuse 1st group 
(in PMC) 
2nd group 
(in DCSPMC) 
LED


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 354 - 
Connector number Application 
CP1 24 VDC power input 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
CE75－76 DI/DO 
JA60 Manual pulse generator 
 - LED 
This printed circuit board incorporates two green LEDs, “LINK1”(1st group in PMC) and “LINK2”(2nd 
group in DCSPMC), and three red LEDs, “ALM1”(1st group in PMC), “ALM2”(2nd group in DCSPMC) 
and “FUSE” in above figure.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and “FUSE” in above figure. 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for descriptions of the correspondence 
between the on/off state of each LED and the status of this I/O module. 
 - Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location 
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm 
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs. 
PMC alarm message 
Faulty location Group 
number 
Gyy 
Slot number 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
0 to 23 
(1st group 
in PMC) 
01 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte in PMC 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte in PMC


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 355 - 
4.2.12 I/O Unit for Power Magnetics Cabinet [Supporting I/O Link i] 
 - Specification 
Item Ordering specifications Specification 
I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet A02B-0319-C001 DI/DO=96/64, With MPG interface 
Fuse (Spare parts) A03B-0815-K001 1A 
 - Connector, LED, and fuse locations 
Connector number Use 
JD1A Second I/O Link i stage 
JD1B First I/O Link i stage 
JA3 Manual pulse generator 
CP1 24VDC input 
CP2 24VDC output


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CP2 24VDC output 
CB104 General purpose DI/DO 
CB105 General purpose DI/DO 
CB106 General purpose DI/DO 
CB107 General purpose DI/DO 
CP1 
CP2 
CB104 
CB105 
CB106 
CB107 
JA3 
JD1A 
JD1B 
Fuse 
FUSE LED 
(red) 
LINK LED 
(green) 
ALM LED 
(red) 
Faston terminal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 356 - 
 - LED 
The I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet incorporates a green LED, “LINK”, and two red LEDs, “ALM” 
and “FUSE”. 
See Subsection “Items Common to Units Supporting I/O Link i” for descriptions of the correspondence 
between the on/off state of each LED and the status of the I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet. 
 - Correspondence between PMC alarm message and faulty location


key: chroma:document
string_value:
With the I/O Link i, the PMC alarm message “WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm 
Ybbb=**H)” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen if a DO alarm occurs. 
The following table indicates the correspondence between “zz” byte of slot “yy” in that message and 
where alarm occurs. 
PMC alarm message 
Slot number Faulty location 
Syy 
Intra-slot byte 
address 
zz 
01 
00 DO alarm occurs at 0th byte 
01 DO alarm occurs at 1st byte 
02 DO alarm occurs at 2nd byte


key: chroma:document
string_value:
03 DO alarm occurs at 3rd byte 
04 DO alarm occurs at 4th byte 
05 DO alarm occurs at 5th byte 
06 DO alarm occurs at 6th byte 
07 DO alarm occurs at 7th byte 
4.3 SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE UNIT 
 - Specification 
Name Specification 
Basic unit A02B-0323-C205 
Additional unit A02B-0323-C204 
 - Connector mounting location 
JF101(JF105)
JF102(JF106)
JF103(JF107)
JF104(JF108)
JA4A
CNF1（CNF2）


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 357 - 
The parenthesized connector names are for the additional unit. 
Connector number Application 
CP11A 24 VDC power input 
CP11B 24 VDC power output 
COP10A Back stage of the FSSB interface 
COP10B Front stage of the FSSB interface 
JF101 to JF104 (JF105 to JF108) Separate detector interface 
JA4A Connection of a battery for the absolute detector 
CNF1 (CNF2) Connection of the additional unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The parenthesized connector names are for the additional unit. 
 - LED display 
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case. Two green LEDs (POWER and 
OPEN) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and ERR2) are provided. The locations and meanings of the LEDs are 
indicated below. 
POWER 
ERR1,ERR2 LINK 
LED indication 
No. LED Meaning 
1 POWER Turned on when the power is on 
2 LINK Turned on when FSSB communication is performed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 ERR1 Turned on when COP10A (back stage) is disconnected 
4 ERR2 Turned on when COP10B (front stage) is disconnected


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 358 - 
4.4 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit 
 - Specification 
Name Specification 
Basic unit A06B-6061-C202 
The additional unit A02B-0323-C204 mentioned in the previous subsection can be used with this interface 
unit.
 - Connector mounting location 
JF111 
JF112 
JF113 
JF114 
JA4A 
CNF1 
The parenthesized connector names are for the additional unit. 
Connector number Application 
CP11A 24 VDC power input


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CP11A 24 VDC power input 
CP11B 24 VDC power output 
COP10A Back stage of the FSSB interface 
COP10B Front stage of the FSSB interface 
JF111 to JF114 Separate detector interface 
JA4A Connection of a battery for the absolute detector 
CNF1 Connection of the additional unit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 359 - 
 - LED display 
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case. Two green LEDs (POWER and 
LINK) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and ERR2) are provided. The locations and meanings of the LEDs are 
indicated below. 
POWER 
ERR1,ERR2 LINK 
LED indication 
No. LED Meaning 
1 POWER Turned on when the power is on 
2 LINK Turned on when FSSB communication is performed 
3 ERR1 Turned on when COP10A (back stage) is disconnected


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 ERR2 Turned on when COP10B (front stage) is disconnected 
4.5 PANEL iH Pro
Please refer to “FANUC PANEL i / iH Pro CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 
(B-64683EN) or PANEL iH Pro CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64703EN)” 
about maintenance of PANEL iH Pro.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 360 - 
4.6 REPLACING BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PULSECODERS 
4.6.1 Overview 
• When the voltage of the batteries for absolute Pulsecoders becomes low, alarm 307 or 306 occurs, 
with the following indication in the CNC state display at the bottom of the CNC screen. 
Alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) : 
 The indication "APC" blinks in reversed display. 
Alarm 306 (battery zero alarm) :


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The indication "ALM" blinks in reversed display. 
• When alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) occurs, replace the 
battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery should be replaced within one or two weeks, 
however, this depends on the number of Pulsecoders used. 
• When alarm 306 (battery zero alarm) occurs, Pulsecoders are reset to the initial state, in which 
absolute positions are not held. Alarm 300 (reference position return request alarm) also occurs,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
indicating that reference position return is required. 
• In general, replace the batteries periodically within the service life listed below.
- A06B-6050-K061 or D-size alkaline dry cells (LR20) : 
 Two years (for each six-axis configuration) 
- A06B-6114-K504 : 
 One year (for each three-axis configuration) 
NOTE 
 The above values indicate the estimated service life of batteries used with 
FANUC absolute Pulsecoders. The actual battery service life depends on the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
machine configuration based on, for example, detector types. For details, contact 
the machine tool builder. 
4.6.2 Replacing Batteries 
To prevent absolute position information in absolute Pulsecoders from being lost, turn on the machine 
power before replacing the battery. The replacement procedure is described below. 
<1> Ensure that the power to the servo amplifier is turned on. 
<2> Ensure that the machine is in the emergency stop state (the motor is inactive).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<3> Ensure that the DC link charge LED of the servo amplifier is off. 
<4> Detach the old batteries and attach new ones. 
The replacement of the batteries in a separate battery case and the replacement of the battery built into the 
servo amplifier are described below in detail. 
NOTE 
 The absolute Pulsecoder of each of the αi/αi S series servo motors and the βi S 
series servo motors (βi S0.4 to βi S22) has a built-in backup capacitor.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Therefore, even when the power to the servo amplifier is off and the batteries 
are replaced, reference position return is not required if the replacement 
completes within less than 10 minutes. Turn the power on and replace the 
batteries if the replacement will take 10 minutes or more.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS
- 361 - 
 WARNING 
• To prevent electric shock, be careful not to touch metal parts in the power 
magnetics cabinet when replacing the batteries. 
• Because the servo amplifier uses a large-capacitance electrolytic capacitor 
internally, the servo amplifier remains charged for a while even after the power is 
turned off. Before touching the servo amplifier for maintenance or other


key: chroma:document
string_value:
purposes, ensure your safety by measuring the residual voltage in the DC link 
with a tester and confirming that the charge indication LED (red) is off. 
• Be sure to replace the batteries with specified ones. Pay attention to the battery 
polarity. If a wrong type of battery is used or a battery is installed with incorrect 
polarity, the battery may overheat, blow out, or catch fire, or the absolute 
position information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Ensure that the battery connector is inserted in the correct position. 
4.6.3 Replacing the Batteries in a Separate Battery Case 
Use the following procedure to replace the batteries in the battery case.
<1> Loosen the screws on the battery case and detach the cover. 
<2> Replace the batteries in the case (pay attention to the polarity). 
<3> Attach the cover to the battery case. 
Battery case (with a cover) 
A06B-6050-K060 
Batteries 
Four A06B-6050-K061 batteries or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
D-size alkaline dry cells 
 CAUTION 
• Four D-size alkaline dry cells (LR20) that are commercially available can be 
used as batteries. A set of four A06B-6050-K061 batteries is optionally available 
from FANUC. 
• Replace all the four batteries with new ones. If old and new batteries are mixed, 
the absolute position information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE OTHER UNITS B-64695EN/01
- 362 - 
4.6.4 Replacing the Battery Built into the Servo Amplifier 
Use the following procedure to replace the special lithium battery. 
<1> Detach the battery cover. 
<2> Replace the special lithium battery. 
<3> Attach the battery cover. 
 CAUTION 
• Purchase the battery from FANUC because it is not commercially available. It is 
therefore recommended that you have a backup battery.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• When the built-in battery is used, do not connect BATL (B3) of connector 
CXA2A/CXA2B. Also, do not connect two or more batteries to the same BATL 
(B3) line. These connections are dangerous because battery output voltages 
may be short-circuited, causing the batteries to overheat. 
• Install the battery in the servo amplifier in a direction that allows slack in the 
cable. If the battery cable is under tension, a bad connection may occur.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• If the +6 V pin and 0 V pin are short-circuited, the battery may overheat, blow 
out, or catch fire, or the absolute position information in the absolute 
Pulsecoders may be lost. 
• When inserting the connector, align it to the connector pins. 
[Connecting the battery] 
The battery for the βiSV4-B and βiSV20-B series amplifiers is mounted in the battery case on the 
underside of each of the amplifiers.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The battery for the other βi-B series amplifiers and the αi-B series amplifiers is mounted at the front of 
each of the amplifiers. 
[αi series][βi series βi SV40, βi SV80] [βi series βi SV4, βi SV 20]
Battery 
Battery case 
Insertion direction 
Red: +6 V 
Connector Black: 0 V 
Cable side Insertion direction Cable side
Red: +6 V 
Black: 0 V 
CX5X 
+6 V 
 0 V 
Connector 
Battery 
Battery case 
CX5X 
+6 V 
 0 V 
[Battery sets and outlines] 
Battery ordering


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Battery ordering 
drawing number Applicable servo amplifier 
Battery case 
ordering drawing 
number 
Outline 
A06B-6114-K504 
αi-B series 60/90 mm width A06B-6114-K505 
αi-B series 150/300 mm width A06B-6114-K506 
βiSVSP-B series A06B-6114-K506 
βiSV-B series βi SV20/20,40/40-B A06B-6114-K505 
A06B-6093-K001 βiSV-B series βiSV4, βiSV20-B A06B-6093-K002 
βiSV-B series βiSV40, βiSV80-B A06B-6093-K002 
Used batteries


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Used batteries 
Old batteries should be disposed as "INDUSTRIAL WASTES" according to the regulations of the 
country or autonomy where your machine has been installed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 363 - 
5 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 
After you change a FROM/SRAM module, you must set various data again. This chapter explains how to 
input data (such as parameters, part programs, and tool offset values) to external I/O devices (such as a 
floppy disk drive) and to output it from them. 
5.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT 
Setting procedure of parameters 
Parameter writing is enabled with following steps 1 to 3.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state. 
2 Press function key several times or press soft key [SETTING] to display SETTING 
(HANDY) screen. 
3 Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press and keys in this order. Here alarm 
100 will be displayed. 
4 Press function key several times to display the following screen. 
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is displayed. 
<1> Soft key [NO. SRH] : Searched by number. 
 Examination) Parameter number → [NO. SRH].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<2> Soft key [ON : 1] : Item with cursor position is set to 1 (bit parameter) 
<3> Soft key [OFF : 0] : Item with cursor position is set to 0 (bit parameter) 
<4> Soft key [+INPUT] : Input value is added to the value at cursor (word type) 
<5> Soft key [INPUT] : Input value is replaced with the value at cursor (word type) 
<6> Soft key [F INPUT] : Parameters are input from RS-232C interface. 
<7> Soft key [F OUTPUT] : Parameters are output to RS-232C interface.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on the SETTING screen to 0. Press 
 to release alram 100. 
7 Convenient method 
To make the cursor 
display in bit unit, 
press the cursor key 
 or .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 364 -
<1> To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key or , then the cursor becomes bit 
length and you can set parameters bit by bit (Bit parameter only).
<2> To set data consecutively, use key.
(Ex.1)
This key sequence sets data as follows:
0 1234
0 ⇒ 4567
0 9999
0 0
(Ex.2)
This key sequence sets data as follows:
0 1234
0 ⇒ 0
0 9999
0 0
<3> To set the same data sequentially, press = .
(Ex.1)
This key sequence sets data as follows:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0 1234
0 ⇒ 1234
0 1234
0 0
<4> Bit parameters can be set as follows:
(Ex.1)
This key sequence sets data as follows:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⇒ 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE to 0.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 365 -
5.2 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA
The CNC memorized the following data. 
Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally.
(1) CNC paramter
(2) PMC parameter
(3) Pitch error compensation amount
(4) Custom macro variable values
(5) Tool compensation amount 
(6) Part program (machining program, custom macro program)
5.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output
Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Parameters required for output are as follows :
In addition, (*) indicates the standard setting for input/output devices made by FANUC. Change these 
settings according to the unit you actually use.
(Parameter can be changed in MDI mode or emergency stop status.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO
ISO 0: Output with EIA code
1: Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)
NOTE
1 The I/O setting of a memory card is made by bit 0 (ISO) of 
parameter No. 0139.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter No. 0139.
2 The I/O setting of an USB memory is made by bit 0 (ISU) of 
parameter No. 11505.
0020 Selection of I/O channel
(*) 0 : Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
1 : Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
2 : Channel 2 (JD36A of mother board)
4 : Memory card interface
17 : USB memory interface
An operation example shown here assumes that data input/ output is performed with an input/output unit 
connected to the JD56A. (I/O channel = 0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0101 NFD ASI SB2
NFD 0 : Feed is output before and after the data at data output.
1 : Feed is not output before and after the data at data output.
ASI(*) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used for input/output data.
1 : ASCII code is used.
SB2 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.
(*) 1 : No. of stop bits is 2.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 366 -
0102 Number specified fot the input/output device
Set value Input/output device
0 RS-232C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 RS-232C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
0103 Baud Rate
1: 50 7: 600 11: 9600
3: 110 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
4: 150 9: 2400
6: 300 (*)10: 4800
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0139 ISO
ISO 0: Output with ASCII code
1: Output with ISO code (memory card)
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to 
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity


key: chroma:document
string_value:
information is not included and a data error during the data 
input/output is not detected.
3 DNC operation from a memory card also must set the parameter to 
1, and execute DNC operation by ISO code. ASCII codes is 
dangerous because parity information is not included and a data 
error during the data input is not detected.
NOTE
A tool (FANUC ISO Converter) for converting data from ASCII code 
to ISO code on a commercial PC is available from FANUC.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11505 ISU


key: chroma:document
string_value:
11505 ISU
ISU 0: Output with ASCII code
1: Output with ISO code (USB memory)
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to 
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity 
information is not included and a data error during the data 
input/output is not detected.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 367 -
NOTE
A tool (FANUC ISO Converter) for converting data from ASCII code 
to ISO code on a commercial PC is available from FANUC.
5.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters
1 Enter EDIT mode or the emergency stop condition.
2 Press function key and soft key [PARAMETER] to select a parameter screen.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and continuous menu key .
4 Press soft key [F OUTPUT] and [EXEC],and the parameters are started to be output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5.2.3 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key and continuous menu key several times, then press [PITCH] to 
select the pitch error compensation setting screen.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and continuous menu key .
4 Press soft key [F OUTPUT] and [EXEC], then pitch error compensation amount is started to be 
output.
5.2.4 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values
When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable No. 500 and later are output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press function key .
3 Press continuous menu key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro variable screen.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then continuous menu key .
5 Press soft key [F OUTPUT] and [EXEC], then custom macro variable values are output.
5.2.5 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press function key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool compensation amount screen.
3 Press [(OPRT)] key and continuous menu key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press soft key [F OUTPUT] an [EXEC] key, and the tool compensation amount is started to be 
output.
5.2.6 Outputting Part Program
1 Confirm the following parameters. If this parameter is set to 1, rather than the value indicated by l, 
change to MDI mode and then reset to 0.
However, if you changed the parameter setting, restore the original value after finishing this work.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
NE9(*) 0: Programs of 9000s are edited.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1: Programs of 9000s can be protected. (Protected programs are not output.)
NE8 (*) 0: Programs of 8000s are edited.
1: Programs of 8000s can be protected.
(Protected programs are not output.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 368 -
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press function key and press soft key [PROGRAM] to display program text.
4 Press [(OPRT)] key and press continuous menu key .
5 Input a program number to be output. To output all programs input as: 
6 Press [F OUTPUT] and [EXEC] key, then program output is started.
5.2.7 Inputting CNC Parameters
1 Set to the emergency stop state.
2 Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In addition, (*) indicates the standard setting for input/output devices made by FANUC. Change 
these settings according to the unit you actually use.
<1> Press function key several times, and press [SETING] to display SETTING screen.
<2> Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
<3> Press function key to select the parameter screen.
0020 Selection of I/O channel
(*) 0: Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
1: Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
2: Channel 2 (JD36A of mother board)
4: Memory card interface


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4: Memory card interface
17 : USB memory interface
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
NFD 0: Feed is output before and after the data at data output.
1: Feed is not output before and after the data at data output.
ASI 0: EIA or ISO code is used.
1: ASCII code is used.
SB2 0: No. of stop bits is 1.
(*) 1: No. of stop bits is 2.
0102 Specification number of I/O device
Set value Input/output device
0 RS-232C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 RS-232C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 369 -
0103 Baud rate
1: 50 7: 600 11: 9600
3: 110 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
4: 150 9: 2400
6: 300 (*)10: 4800
3 Press continuous menu key .
4 Press soft key [F INPUT] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters are started.
5 Upon completion of parameter input, turn off the power then turn on the power again.
6 Alarm 300 is issued if the system employs an absolute pulse coder. In such a case, perform reference 
position return again.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0139 ISO
ISO 0: Output with ASCII code
1: Output with ISO code (memory card)
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to 
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity 
information is not included and a data error during the data 
input/output is not detected.
3 DNC operation from a memory card also must set the parameter to 
1, and execute DNC operation by ISO code. ASCII codes is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
dangerous because parity information is not included and a data 
error during the data input is not detected.
NOTE
A tool (FANUC ISO Converter) for converting data from ASCII code 
to ISO code on a commercial PC is available from FANUC.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11505 ISU
ISU 0: Output with ASCII code
1: Output with ISO code (USB memory)
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to 
input or output data using ISO codes.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity 
information is not included and a data error during the data 
input/output is not detected.
NOTE
A tool (FANUC ISO Converter) for converting data from ASCII code 
to ISO code on a commercial PC is available from FANUC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 370 -
5.2.8 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount
1 Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode.
2 Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen.
3 Press function key and soft key [PROGRAM] to display program contents.
4 Press function key several times, soft key [PARAM], continuous menu key and 
[PITCH] to select the screen for pitch error compensation amount.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the function key and continuous menu key several times, then press [PITCH] to 
select the pitch error compensation setting screen.
6 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and continuous menu key .
7 Press soft key [F INPUT] and [EXEC], then the pitch error compensation amount is started to be 
input.
8 After data has been input, press function key twice to display the SETTING screen and return 
the PARAMETER WRITE to 0.
5.2.9 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values


key: chroma:document
string_value:
* If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion, input the variable values.
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press function key then soft key [PROGRAM] to display program contents.
3 Press the function key and press continuous menu key several times, then press 
[PITCH] to select the pitch error compensation setting screen.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and continuous menu key .
5 Press soft key [F INPUT] and [EXEC], then the pitch error compensation amount is started to be 
input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
input.
5.2.10 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount
1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Turn off the program protect (KEY=1).
3 Press function key , and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool compensation amount screen.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and continuous menu key .
5 Press [F INPUT] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.
5.2.11 Inputting Part Programs
Confirm the following parameters. If the setting is different from the value indicated by (*), reset to the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
specified value only during this work. (Change it in MDI mode).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE RAL
NPE When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02,M30 and M99 are:
0: Regarded as the end of program.
(*) 1: Not regarded as the end of porgram.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 371 -
RAL When programs are registered:
(*) 0: All programs are registered.
1: Only one program is registered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
NE9 (*) 0: Programs of 9000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 9000s are protected.
NE8 (*) 0: Programs of 8000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 8000s are protected.
* For PPR, item 4 is not required.
1 Confirm that mode is EDIT mode.
2 Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press function key and press soft key [PROGRAM] to select a part program file.
4 Press soft key [F INPUT] and [EXEC], then data input is started.
5.3 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP
It is possible to back up data held in the CNC’s FROM/SRAM by storing it automatically in the FROM, 
which requires no battery and to restore the baked-up data as required. If data is lost from the CNC due to 
unforeseen circumstances, this function can be used to restore the data easily.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Also, it is possible to hold up to three occurrences of backup data. With this function, the CNC data can 
be quickly switched to a post-machine adjustment state or an arbitrary backup state.
Restore
Backup
SRAM (requires batteries)
All types of data, such as 
parameters and offset data, in 
SRAM
FROM (requires no battery)
NC programs and directory 
information
Backup data 2
Backup data 1
Backup data 3
Explanation
- Data to be backed up


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Data to be backed up
Data in the CNC is backed up by storing it in the FROM, which requires no battery.
• NC programs and directory information held in the FROM (which requires no battery)
• Various types of data, such as parameters and offset values, held in the SRAM (which requires 
batteries)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 372 -
Setting bit 2 (AAP) of parameter No.10340 to 1 enables NC programs and directory information in the 
FROM to be backed up. Set this parameter only when necessary, because the required backup time and 
data storage size vary depending on the size of the programs.
Setting parameter No. 10342 enables up to 3 occurrences of backup data to be held.
- Backup modes
The following three backup modes are available.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1. Automatic backup occurring every time the power is turned on
2. Automatic backup occurring at intervals of a specified number of days when the power is turned on
3. Backup started manually at an emergency stop
- Automatic backup occurring every time the power is turned on
Data in the CNC can be backed up automatically when the power is turned on.
This mode can be used by:
• Setting bit 0 (ABP) of parameter No. 10340 to 1
• Setting parameter No. 10342 to 1 or greater


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Setting bit 2 (AAP) of parameter No. 10340 to 1 if also NC programs and directory information in
the FROM must be backed up
- Automatic backup occurring at intervals of a specified number of days when 
the power is turned on
Data in the CNC can be backed up automatically when the power is turned on for the first time in a 
specified number of days since the previous backup.
This mode can be used by:
• Selecting the first backup mode (automatic backup occurring every time the power is turned on)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Setting parameter No. 10341 with a number of days at intervals of which automatic backup is to be 
made cyclically
- Backup started manually at an emergency stop
Data in the CNC can be backed up by starting an appropriate procedure manually in an emergency stop 
state. This mode makes it possible to back up data without turning off the power for the CNC at an 
arbitrary timing, such as when machining has been set up or before a holiday.
This mode can be used by:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This mode can be used by:
• Setting parameter No. 10342 to 1 or greater
• Setting bit 2 (AAP) of parameter No. 10340 to 1 if also NC programs and directory information in 
the FROM must be backed up
[Backup procedure]
1. Put the machine in an emergency stop state.
2. Set bit 7 (EEB) of parameter No. 10340 to 1 to start backup. This parameter becomes 0 just after the 
backup sequence has started.
3. The execution status of backup can be checked with No. 1016 on the diagnosis screen described


key: chroma:document
string_value:
later.
NOTE
It takes time since the beginning of backup till the end of backup. So, if data being 
backed up is updated, it is likely that a mismatch may occur between the original 
data and backup data. When updating data in the CNC at an emergency stop, 
watch the automatic data backup in-progress signal ATBK and perform 
appropriate processing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 373 -
- Backup execution status 
In the backup modes used at power-on time, 10 dots “.” are used to indicate the execution status of 
backup. For example, the completion of backup is indicated with: “AUTO BACKUP : ……….END
The diagnosis screen can also be used to check the execution status of backup as follows:
• No.1016#0 (AEX): Backup in progress 
• No.1016#6 (ACM): Backup completed
• No.1016#7 (ANG): Error during backup


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• No.1016#1 (DT1), #2 (DT2), #3 (DT3): Updated data
- Write-protected backup data
Factory-set or post-adjustment machine status data can be held as write-protected backup data by 
specifying the number of pieces of backup data to 2 or greater with parameter No. 10342. The first piece 
of backup data is handled as write-protected backup data.
This function is enabled by:
• Setting bit 1 (ABI) of parameter No. 10340 to 1 
• Setting parameter No. 10342 to 2 or greater


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Setting bit 2 (AAP) of parameter No. 10340 to 1 if also NC programs and directory information in 
the FROM must be backed up
[Backup procedure]
1. Set bit 6 (EIB) of parameter No. 10340 to 1.
2. Turn the power for the CNC off and on again. When the power is turned on, the first piece of backup 
data is updated automatically, and bit 6 (EIB) of parameter No. 10340 becomes 0.
The second and third pieces of backup data are updated each time another type of backup (automatic


key: chroma:document
string_value:
backup occurring every time the power is turned on, automatic backup occurring at intervals of a 
specified number of days when the power is turned on, or backup started manually at an emergency stop) 
is made.
- Parity check
A parity check is made at backup. If a parity error is detected, the backup is not completed.
- Restoring backed-up data
With the BOOT SYSTEM, executing the following procedure can restore backed-up data from FROM.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 From the BOOT’s TOP menu, select “7. SRAM DATA UTILITY”. The following menu appears. 
Select ”3”.
SRAM DATA UTILITY
 1.SRAM BACKUP ( CNC -> MEMORY CARD )
 2.SRAM RESTORE ( MEMORY CARD -> CNC )
 3.AUTO BKUP RESTORE ( FROM -> CNC )
 4. END
2. From the menu below, select data and run restore.
AUTO BACKUP DATA RESTORE
 1. BACKUP DATA1 yyyy/mm/dd **:**:**
 2. BACKUP DATA2 yyyy/mm/dd **:**:**
 3. BACKUP DATA3 yyyy/mm/dd **:**:**
 4 END
3. Exit BOOT.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 374 -
Signal
Automatic data backup in-progress signal ATBK<F0520.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal is "1" during automatic data backup. When updating data in the CNC at an 
emergency stop, perform appropriate processing according to the state of this signal.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0520 ATBK
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10340 EEB EIB AAP ABI ABP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] System-common type


key: chroma:document
string_value:
[Data type] System-common type
#0 ABP Automatic data backup at power-on is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#1 ABI Overwrite-protected backup data is:
0: Regarded as invalid.
1: Regarded as valid.
#2 AAP Backup of NC programs and directory information in FROM is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#6 EIB When the CNC is turned on next, overwrite-protected backup data is:
0: Not updated.
1: Updated.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when 2 or a greater value is set in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter No. 10342, and bit 1 (ABI) of parameter No. 10340 is set 
to 1.
#7 EEB When an emergency stop occurs, a backup operation is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed. 
NOTE
This parameter is valid when 1 or a greater value is set in 
parameter No. 10342.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 375 -
10341 Interval at which automatic data backup is performed periodically
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word system-common type
[Unit of data] No unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 365
When automatic data backup is performed periodically, this parameter sets the interval as 
the number of days. When the power is turned on after a set number of days has passed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
from the date of the previous backup, a backup operation is performed. If 0 is set in this 
parameter, this function is disabled.
10342 Number of backup data items
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte system-common type
[Unit of data] No unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
This parameter sets the number of backup data items. If 0 is specified, backup is not 
performed.
Diagnosis display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
performed.
Diagnosis display
This function enables the status of backup execution to be checked.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1016 ANG ACM DT3 DT2 DT1 AEX
#0 AEX Indicates whether automatic data backup is being executed, as follows:
0: Not being executed
1: Being executed
#1 DT1 Indicates whether data 1 has been updated in the previous backup, as follows:
0: Not updated
1: Updated
#2 DT2 Indicates whether data 2 has been updated in the previous backup, as follows:
0: Not updated
1: Updated


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0: Not updated
1: Updated
#3 DT3 Indicates whether data 3 has been updated in the previous backup, as follows:
0: Not updated
1: Updated
#6 ACM Indicates whether automatic data backup has been executed, as follows:
0: Not executed
1: Executed
#7 ANG Indicates whether an error has occurred in automatic data backup, as follows:
0: Not occurred
1: Occurred


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 376 -
Caution
CAUTION
1 A value that can be set in parameter No. 10342 (number of occurrences of 
backup data held) is limited according to the program size, SRAM capacity, and 
the FROM/SRAM module used.
2 Do not turn off the power for the NC during backup or restoration.
3 If backed-up data is restored, parameters submitted to automatic backup are 
returned to the state in which they were when backed up. Change them as 
required.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
required.
5.4 Data Batch Backup and Restore
When selecting "12. DATA BATCH BACKUP/RESTORE" on IPL monitor menu, the following files 
can be output (save) to I/O device (Memory card or USB memory) with only one operation. And the all 
of output files can be input (restore) to CNC with only one operation.
- SRAM data (A data that was backed up by a battery on the main board of CNC)
- User files (The file that the machine tool builder makes. Example. PMC ladder and application file


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of C language executor.)
For detail of the IPL monitor, refer to "APPENDIX, IPL MONITOR" in this manual.
5.4.1 Display IPL monitor and Menu for Batch backup and restore
Execute the batch backup and restore on the menu for batch data backup and restore on IPL monitor.
Procedure for displaying the menu of batch backup and restore
1. Display IPL monitor.
Turn on the power while pressing MDI key [ . ] and [ - ].
For the details of procedure, refer to "APPENDIX. IPL MONITOR" in this manual.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2. Input menu number which you want to operate with MDI key or keyboard of personal computer. 
Input 12 when operating batch backup and restore.
SERIES 0I D4G3-01.0
COPYRIGHT(C) FANUC CORPORATION 2018-
LOAD SYSTEM LABEL : END
IPL MENU
 0. END IPL
 1. DUMP MEMORY
 3. CLEAR MEMORY
 4. MEMORY CARD UTILITY
 5. SYSTEM ALARM UTILITY
 6. FILE SRAM CHECK UTILITY
 7. MACRO COMPILER UTILITY
 8. SYSTEM SETING UTILITY
 12. BATCH DATA BACKUP/RESTORE 
 13.CEXE SRAM DATA BACKUP/RESTORE
?


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 377 -
SERIES 0I D4G3-01.0
COPYRIGHT(C) FANUC CORPORATION 2018-
BATCH DATA BACKUP/RESTORE MENU
 0. END 
 1. BATCH DATA BACKUP (CNC -> MEMORY CARD)
 2. BATCH DATA RESTORE (MEMORY CARD -> CNC)
11. BATCH DATA BACKUP (CNC -> USB MEMORY)
12. BATCH DATA RESTORE (USB MEMORY -> CNC)
? 
I/O interface
The I/O interface for output and input of data is different in other than personal computer functions and personal computer 
functions.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
functions.
Other than personal computer functions :
I/O device which is inserted to the slot at side of LCD. (Memory card or USB memory)
Personal computer functions：
The folder in personal computer which is specified by NCBOOT32.
Specify the folder by "setting" of pop-up menu on IPL monitor. If don't specify, the output and input folder is the root of C 
drive (<C:¥>).
5.4.2 Data Batch backup
SRAM data and user files are output to I/O device. Execute the output operation according to the menu


key: chroma:document
string_value:
for batch backup and restore on IPL monitor.
CAUTION
1 The file which is saved by this function is compatible only in the CNC of same 
hardware and option construct.
2 The output file name is a fixed default file name. If a file with the same name 
already exists in I/O device, the file is overwritten. It is recommended to format 
the I/O device before using this function.
Explanation for batch backup


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation for batch backup
By the operation of menu for batch data backup and restore on IPL monitor, SRAM data and user files are 
saved to I/O device. For the kind of saved data and file name, refer to Subsection "EXAMPLE OF 
OUTPUT FILE" in this manual.
Procedure for operation
1. Install I/O device (Memory card or USB memory) to CNC.
2. Select a menu for batch backup and restore on the IPL monitor.
3. Input "1" when the memory card is used with MDI key, and input "11" when the USB memory is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
used.
SERIES 0I D4G3-01.0
COPYRIGHT FANUC CORPORATION 2018-
BATCH DATA BACKUP/RESTORE MENU
 0. END 
 1. BATCH DATA BACKUP (CNC -> MEMORY CARD)
 2. BATCH DATA RESTORE (MEMORY CARD -> CNC)
11. BATCH DATA BACKUP (CNC -> USB MEMORY)
12. BATCH DATA RESTORE (USB MEMORY -> CNC)
?


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 378 -
4. The confirmation message is displayed. Then input "1" with MDI key when batch backup is 
executed.
Batch backup is not executed if "0" is input. Then the menu for batch backup and restore is 
displayed again.
Example) the confirmation message (for memory card).
BATCH DATA BACKUP (CNC -> MEMORY CARD)
BATCH DATA BACKUP OK ? (NO=0,YES=1)
5. The progress report of the saving processing is displayed during the saving.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BATCH DATA BACKUP OK ? (NO=0,YES=1) 1
SRAM DATA BACKUP : SRAM_BAK.001 00240000/00240000 END
USER FILE BACKUP : PMC1.000 00020000/00040000
6. The message "END" is displayed at the side of file size when batch backup had been finished. Then 
the menu for batch backup and restore is displayed again. This menu is ended if "0" is input with 
MDI key.
Error occurred
The error message is displayed in red on screen, if the error occurs for executing the batch backup. Then


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the menu for batch backup and restore is displayed again. For the contents and measures of error, refer to 
Subsection "ERROR MESSAGE" in this manual.
Restriction
1. The file which is saved by this function is compatible only in the CNC of same hardware and option 
construct.
2. The output files are output to the root folder in I/O device. Cannot be output to the sub-folder.
3. The name of file which is output to I/O device is a fixed default file name. For the file name, refer to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
"5.4.4 EXAMPLE OF OUTPUT FILE" in this manual.
If a file with the same name already exists in I/O device, the file is overwritten.
4. It is recommended to format the I/O device before using this function. Format a USB memory with 
FAT16 or FAT32 and format a memory card with FAT16 when formatting these with the personal 
computer. The I/O device which formatted with the type of not listed above cannot be used.
5. User file is not saved when the error occurs on saving the SRAM data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. Option information file "OPRM_INF.000" is saved on saving the user file.
7. The saving cannot be canceled during batch backup.
8. Don't turn off the CNC power during saving. Saving does not be finished normally if the power is 
cut on saving.
The size of file which is saving.
(byte, hexadecimal form)
The size which had been saved. (byte, hexadecimal form)
The file name which is saving.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 379 -
5.4.3 Data Batch Restore
The files which are output by data batch backup can be restored to SRAM/FROM module in CNC. 
Execute the restoration operation according to the menu for batch backup and restore on IPL monitor.
CAUTION
1 The file which is saved by this function is compatible only in the CNC of same 
hardware and option construct.
2 If an option information file is restored, CNC become to "Option authentication


key: chroma:document
string_value:
wait state" when CNC is rebooted. It is necessary to perform optional parameter 
authentication work. However, if the option information in CNC is the same as 
this file, this file is not restored.
3 All files in not only the file saved by data batch backup but also I/O device are 
restored. Store only the file that you want to restore to I/O device.
Explanation for Batch restore
By the operation of menu for batch backup and restore, SRAM data and user files are restored from I/O 
device.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
device.
The order of restoration
The file which is output by data batch backup is restored in order of the following.
1. Option information file
2. SRAM data
3. User files (excluding option information file)
The name of restored file
The file name of SRAM data which is restored is fixed as "SRAM_BAK.001".
The restored option information file and user file are decided based on the file name information which is 
mounted to itself. It is not the file name on I/O device.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
Don't edit the name of file which is output by data batch backup, in case the 
unwilled option information file or user file is restored.
Procedure for operation
1. Install I/O device (Memory card or USB memory) to CNC.
2. Select a menu for batch backup and restore on the IPL monitor.
3. Input "2" when the memory card is used with MDI key, and input "12" when the USB memory is 
used.
SERIES 0I D4G3-01.0
COPYRIGHT(C) FANUC CORPORATION 2018-
BATCH DATA BACKUP/RESTORE MENU
 0. END


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0. END 
 1. BATCH DATA BACKUP (CNC -> MEMORY CARD)
 2. BATCH DATA RESTORE (MEMORY CARD -> CNC)
11. BATCH DATA BACKUP (CNC -> USB MEMORY)
12. BATCH DATA RESTORE (USB MEMORY -> CNC)
?


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 380 -
4. The confirmation message is displayed. Then input "1" with MDI key when batch restore is 
executed. Batch restore is not executed if "0" is input. Then the menu for batch backup and restore is 
displayed again.
Example) the confirmation message (for memory card).
BATCH DATA RESTORE (MEMORY CARD -> CNC)
BATCH DATA RESTORE OK ? (NO=0,YES=1)
5. The progress report of the restoring processing is displayed during the restoring.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BATCH DATA RESTORE (MEMORY CARD -> CNC)
BATCH DATA RESTORE OK ? (NO=0,YES=1) 1
OPRM_INF RESTORE : OPRM_INF.000 00020000/00020000 END
SRAM FILE RESTORE : SRAM_BAK.001 00240000/00240000 END
USER FILE RESTORE : PMC1.000 00020000/00040000
6. The message "POWER MUST BE OFF." is displayed at the screen when batch restore had been 
finished. Reboot the CNC.
Any key is invalid when this message is displayed.
SERIES 0I D4G3-01.0
COPYRIGHT(C) FANUC CORPORATION 2018-
BATCH DATA RESTORE (MEMORY CARD -> CNC)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BATCH DATA RESTORE OK ? (NO=0,YES=1) 1
OPRM_INF RESTORE : OPRM_INF.000 00020000/00020000 END
SRAM FILE RESTORE : SRAM_BAK.001 00240000/00240000 END
USER FILE RESTORE : PMC1.000 00040000/00040000 END
POWER MUST BE OFF.
7. If an option information file is restored, CNC become to "Option authentication wait state" when 
CNC is rebooted. Perform optional parameter authentication work.
Error occurred


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Error occurred
The error message is displayed in red on screen, if the error occurs for executing the batch restore. Then 
the menu for batch backup and restore is displayed again. For the contents and measures of error, refer to 
"ERROR MESSAGE" in this manual.
Restriction
1. The file which is saved by this function is compatible only in the CNC of same hardware and option 
construct.
2. If an option information file is restored, CNC become to "Option authentication wait state" when


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC is rebooted. It is necessary to perform optional parameter authentication work. However, if the 
option information in CNC is the same as this file, this file is not restored. At this time, the following 
message is displayed.
OPRM_INF RESTORE : LOADING SKIP. NO NECESSITY FOR LOADING.
The size of file which is restoring
(byte, hexadecimal form)
The size which had been restored. (byte, hexadecimal form)
The file name which is restoring.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 381 -
3. All files in a root folder are restored. Store only the file that you want to restore to root folder in I/O 
device.
The file in a sub-folder cannot be restored.
4. The error message "FILE NOT FOUND" is displayed on screen when there is not the option 
information file in I/O device. In this case, the file except for this file is restored.
5. The error message "FILE NOT FOUND" is displayed on screen when there is not the SRAM data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
file . In this case, the file except for this file is restored.
When there is not option information file and SRAM data file also, message is displayed like the 
following.
OPRM_INF RESTORE : FILE NOT FOUND
SRAM FILE RESTORE : SRAM_BAK.001 FILE NOT FOUND
6. The restoration cannot be canceled during batch restore.
7. Don't turn the power to CNC off during the restoration. The file which is inputting then cannot be 
restored normally if the power is cut during the restoration.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5.4.4 Example of Output File
The following is a piece of the file output by this function.
SRAM data and all user files in FROM are saved.
Table 5.4.4 (a) List of files
Content of file File name Description
CNC memory (SRAM data file) SRAM_BAK.001 SRAM data
Option information OPRM_INF.000
PMC sequence program PMCn.000 n: Path number
PMC sequence program
(Dual check safety)
PMCS.000
PMC multi-language message MnPMCMSG.000 n: Path number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Application data (C Language executor) CEX_nnM.000 nn: Either 05, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 
60, 70, 80, 90, or A0
User data file (C Language executor) CEXnxxxx.000 n: numeric character
x: alphanumeric character
Application data (Macro executor) PDnnxxxx.000 n: PCODE number
xxxx: Data size
Application data (FANUC PICTURE) FPF_xxx.000 xxx: Data size
Screen data (FANUC PICTURE) FPF0xx.000 xx: Data size
Machine operation menu data EXSFTKEY.000
I/O configuration data IOCONF.000


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Machine alarm diagnosis data TDG-DATA.000
Backup data (Automatic data backup) ATn_BKUP.000 n: 1, 2, 3
NOTE
1. The name of file which is output to I/O device is a fixed default file name.
2. If a file with the same name already exists in I/O device, the file is overwritten.
3. The output user file is different according to the enabled optional function.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-64695EN/01
- 382 -
5.4.5 Error Message
If the error occurs during executing batch backup or restore, the messages of following are displayed.
Table 5.4.5 (a) List of error message
Error message Description
DEVICE NOT READY I/O device is not ready.
When remove it on outputting or output without mounting, this error occurs.
DEVICE FULL The capacity of I/O device is insufficient.
Make the sufficient free capacity of the one.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DEVICE PROTECTED I/O device is write-protected.
Release the write-protected state of the one.
DEVICE NOT MOUNTED I/O device could not be recognized.
Confirm the format type of the one.
FILE PROTECTED The file is write-protected.
Release the read-only state of the file.
FILE NOT FOUND There is no file which is saved or is restored.
Or the file with a name of 13 characters or more is stored in I/O device.
CANCELED the executing processing has been canceled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
DIRECTORY FULL Cannot make a file at the root folder in I/O device.
Delete the file in root folder.
FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE There is no space in FROM.
Delete the unnecessary file in FROM.
FROM NO MORE DIRECTORY Cannot register the file to FROM. The number of the file which can be 
loaded to FROM is exceeded.
Delete the unnecessary file in FROM.
LOADING SKIP.
NO NECESSITY FOR LOADING.
The option information in CNC is the same as the one in I/O device. 
Therefore, it is not necessary to restore it.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 6. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 383 -
6 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
This section briefly describes the PMC function. It also explains the CNC-PMC interface.
6.1 WHAT IS PMC?
The programmable machine controller (PMC) is a programmable controller (PC) built into a CNC to 
perform sequence control for a machine tool (spindle rotation, tool change, machine operator's panel 
control, and so on).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
control, and so on).
Sequence control is to perform control steps successively in a predetermined sequence or according to the 
logic operation.
Programs for performing sequence control for machine tools are called sequence programs. Generally, 
sequence programs coded in the Ladder language are used.
Fig. 6.1 Basic configuration of PMC
CNC
Internal
I/O
PMC
Sequence
program
External
I/O
Machine
Internal relay
Signal input to PMC
Signal output from PMC


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-64695EN/01
- 384 -
6.2 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN
The basic configuration of the PMC screen is described below.
• Screen title: Displays the name of a specific submenu of the PMC.
• Ladder execution status: Displays the execution status of the ladder program.
• PMC alarm: Indicates whether any PMC alarm is occurring.
• PMC path: Displays the currently selected PMC.
• NC program number: Displays the number of the currently selected NC program.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
• Key entry line: Line for entering a numerical value or character key string.
• Message display line: Displays an error or warning message.
• NC status indication: Displays the NC mode, the execution status of the NC program, the 
currently selected NC path number.
• Return key: Used to switch from the PMC operation menu to a specific PMC 
submenu or from a specific PMC submenu to the main menu of the 
PMC.
• Soft key page turning key: Used to turn soft key pages.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 6. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 385 -
About the PMC screen
When you click the "SYSTEM" function key and then turn the soft key page by clicking the soft key [+], 
the main menu of the PMC is displayed.
The PMC main menu offers the following three types of submenus, which are respectively used for 
specific purposes.
• PMC maintenance
• PMC ladder
• PMC configuration
Each of these PMC submenus is explained below.
(1) PMC maintenance menu


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1) PMC maintenance menu
This menu displays the screens related to the maintenance of the PMC, such as those for PMC signal 
status monitoring and traces and for PMC data display and editing.
(2) PMC ladder menu
This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing of the ladder program.
(3) PMC configuration menu
This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing of the data other than the ladder


key: chroma:document
string_value:
constituting the sequence program, as well as the screen for setting the PMC functions.
This manual briefly describes the screen of each of the PMC maintenance and PMC ladder menus. For 
detailed descriptions and the PMC configuration menu, refer to "PMC Programming Manual
(B-64513EN)."


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-64695EN/01
- 386 -
6.2.1 Transition of the PMC Screens
SYSTEM
PMC MAINTE STATUS
I/O DEVICE 
PMC ALARM 
I/O 
TIMER 
COUNTR 
KEEP RELAY 
DATA 
TRACE 
TRACE SETING 
LIST 
LADDER 
TITLE 
CONFIG PARAM
SETING 
PMC STATUS 
SYSTEM PARAM
MODULE 
SYMBOL 
MESAGE 
ONLINE 
PMC LADDER
PMC CONFIG
<
<
<
Signal status screen
I/O device monitor screen
PMC alarm screen
Data I/O screen
PMC parameter (timer) screen
PMC parameter (counter) screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
PMC parameter (counter) screen
PMC parameter (keep relay) 
screen
PMC parameter (data table) screen
Signal trace screen
Signal trace (parameter setting) 
screen
Program list screen
Ladder display/editing screen
Title display/editing screen
Configuration parameter screen
PMC status screen (multi-PMC switch)
System parameter display/editing 
screen
I/O module display/editing screen
Symbol and comment display/editing 
screen
Message display/editing screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Message display/editing screen
Online monitoring parameter setting 
screen
PMC main menu
PMC ladder submenu
PMC configuration submenu
PMC maintenance submenu
Setting screens (general, message shift, 
I/O link assignment data selection, 
override)
I/O DGN II/O DIAGNOSIS screen
DUP. CHECK Duplicate coil check screen
I/O Link i I/O configuration viewer/editor screen 
(I/O Link i assignment)
PROG LIST PMC program list screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 6. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 387 -
6.3 INTERFACE SIGNAL BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Interface signal between CNC and PMC are as follows:
[Example of controlling one path using one PMC]
G0000~
F0000~
X000~
Y000~ CNC PMC Machine tool
[Example of controlling two paths using one PMC]
G0000~
F0000~
X000~
Y000~
CNC
PMC Machine tool
Path 1
G1000~
F1000~ Path 2
[Example of controlling multi-path CNC using PMC system]
G0000~
F0000~ X000~
Y000~
CNC PMC
I/O device 
for 1st
machine


key: chroma:document
string_value:
I/O device 
for 1st
machine
Path 1
for
machining
G1000~
F1000~
1st
PMC
G0000~
F0000~
G1000~
F1000~
Signal 
I/F 1st
machine
group
G0000~
F0000~
2nd
PMC
G2000~
F2000~
2nd
machine
group
I/O device
for 2nd
machine
X000~
Y000~
Path 1
for loader
Path 2
for
machining
G0000~
F0000~
3rd
PMC
G3000~
F3000~
3rd
machine
group
I/O device
for 3rd
machine
X000~
Y000~
Path 2
for loader


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-64695EN/01
- 388 -
NOTE
Each PMC of a multi-path PMC system has an independent signal area. The F, 
G, X, and Y signal addresses of each PMC begin with 0. On the other hand, the 
F and G signal addresses from the viewpoint of the CNC are fixed for each path 
number. Note that the F and G signal addresses used in programming of each 
ladder are different from those from the viewpoint of the CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 389 -
7 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet function.
7.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET 
CARD
The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two types of devices: the embedded 
Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.
A selection can also be made to stop the embedded Ethernet function.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot for temporary communication.
CAUTION
1 When using the embedded Ethernet function for the first time, set an IP address 
and other items carefully as instructed by the network administrator, then 
perform a sufficient communication test.
Note that an incorrect IP address or other setting may cause a communication 
failure on the entire network for system error in the CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When using it in a state where a communication failure has occurred, 
communication failures of the FOCAS2 / Ethernet function or FTP transfer 
function may occur intermittently.
In this case, please note that CNC may cause a system error.
2 A unit such as a PC situated in the same network can increase the 
communication processing load on the CNC even if the unit is not 
communicating with the CNC.
Avoid connecting the CNC to a factory-wide network. Use a router or the like to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
separate the network including the CNC from the other networks.
3 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is inserted into a memory card slot, with a part of the 
card left uninserted. When using the PCMCIA Ethernet card, take great care not 
to damage the card by hitting the protruding part of the card. 
When the card becomes unnecessary, remove the card immediately, in order to 
prevent any damage to the card.
NOTE
1 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card designated by FANUC. General Ethernet cards


key: chroma:document
string_value:
available on the market cannot be used. 
2 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used for FANUC LADDER-III or SERVO GUIDE. 
3 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card just for temporary communication as described 
above. Avoid using the card for continuous communication.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64695EN/01
- 390 -
Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 ETH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 ETH The embedded Ethernet function (embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA LAN card) is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.
7.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
This section describes the setting of parameters for the embedded Ethernet function.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function
This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
Notes on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the first time
NOTE
1 When running user's original application software created by using the 
FOCAS2/Ethernet function, use the embedded Ethernet port. 
2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function allows up to five FOCAS2/Ethernet clients to be 
connected to one CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
connected to one CNC.
3 Concurrent access by multiple applications or personal computers may overload 
the CNC, reducing the communication speed.
4 For the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the machine tool builder or end user can 
create desired software operated on each personal computer using the FOCAS2 
library software.
Communication timing and other factors may vary depending on the personal 
computer environment. Before starting communication, completely confirm that


key: chroma:document
string_value:
there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the 
personal computer.
Notes on using the CNC Screen Display function for the first time
NOTE
With the CNC screen display functions, up to 1 CNC screen display function 
client can be connected to one CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64695EN/01 7. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 391 -
7.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen
On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear. 
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE
1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the 
PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
2 The settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are 
made when a connection to SERVO GUIDE and FANUC LADDER-III is 
established.
COMMON screen (BASIC)


